diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide')
48 files changed, 3335 insertions, 3335 deletions
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp index 2654abf64e..a4039f5282 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,100 +52,100 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguideauto_offxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Turning Off AutoFormat and AutoCorrect</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-17T15:14:32">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideauto_offxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Turning Off AutoFormat and AutoCorrect</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-17T15:14:32">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3154250"><bookmark_value>turning off automatic correction</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>text; turning off automatic correction</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>uppercase; changing to lowercase</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>capital letters; changing automatically</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>quotation marks; changing automatically</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>words; automatic replacement on/off</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>lines; changing automatically</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>underlining; changing automatically</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>borders; changing automatically</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>automatic changes;turning off</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>changes made automatically</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3154250"><bookmark_value>turning off automatic correction</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>text; turning off automatic correction</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>uppercase; changing to lowercase</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>capital letters; changing automatically</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>quotation marks; changing automatically</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>words; automatic replacement on/off</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>lines; changing automatically</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>underlining; changing automatically</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>borders; changing automatically</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>automatic changes;turning off</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>changes made automatically</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>AutoCorrect function;turning off</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154250" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="E" oldref="1" localize="false"/>
+</bookmark> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154250" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="E" oldref="1" localize="false"/> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3147812" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="16"><variable id="auto_off"><link href="text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp" name="Turning Off AutoFormat and AutoCorrect">Turning Off AutoFormat and AutoCorrect</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3147833" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="2">By default, $[officename] automatically corrects many common typing errors and applies formatting while you type. </paragraph>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3147833" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="2">By default, $[officename] automatically corrects many common typing errors and applies formatting while you type. </paragraph> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN1081B" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">To quickly undo an automatic correction or completion, press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command -</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Z. </paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10846" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">To turn off most AutoFormat features, remove the check mark from the menu <emph>Format - AutoFormat - While Typing</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3147251" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="12">To remove a word from the AutoCorrect list:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147274" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="14">Choose <emph>Tools - AutoCorrect</emph>.<comment>name changed for SO8</comment></paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145596" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="23">Click the <emph>Replace</emph> tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145620" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="15">In the <emph>AutoCorrect</emph> list, select the word pair that you want to remove.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145645" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="24">Click <emph>Delete</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3145668" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="4">To stop replacing quotation marks:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3151196" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="6">Choose <emph>Tools - AutoCorrect</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3151220" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="7">Click the <emph>Custom Quotes</emph> tab</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3151245" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="25">Clear the <emph>Replace</emph> check box(es).</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155076" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="8">To stop capitalizing the first letter of a sentence:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155099" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="10">Choose <emph>Tools - AutoCorrect</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155123" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="11">Click the <emph>Options</emph> tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155148" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="26">Clear the <emph>Capitalize first letter of every sentence</emph> check box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155401" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="17">To stop drawing a line when you type three identical characters:</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155415" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="22">$[officename] automatically draws a line when you type three of the following characters and press Enter: - _ = * ~ #</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155439" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="19">Choose <emph>Tools - AutoCorrect</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155463" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="20">Click the <emph>Options</emph> tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155488" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="27">Clear the <emph>Apply border</emph> check box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp#autotext"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp#number_date_conv"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Z. </paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10846" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">To turn off most AutoFormat features, remove the check mark from the menu <emph>Format - AutoFormat - While Typing</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3147251" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="12">To remove a word from the AutoCorrect list:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147274" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="14">Choose <emph>Tools - AutoCorrect</emph>.<comment>name changed for SO8</comment></paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145596" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="23">Click the <emph>Replace</emph> tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145620" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="15">In the <emph>AutoCorrect</emph> list, select the word pair that you want to remove.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145645" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="24">Click <emph>Delete</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3145668" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="4">To stop replacing quotation marks:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3151196" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="6">Choose <emph>Tools - AutoCorrect</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3151220" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="7">Click the <emph>Custom Quotes</emph> tab</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3151245" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="25">Clear the <emph>Replace</emph> check box(es).</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155076" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="8">To stop capitalizing the first letter of a sentence:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155099" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="10">Choose <emph>Tools - AutoCorrect</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155123" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="11">Click the <emph>Options</emph> tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155148" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="26">Clear the <emph>Capitalize first letter of every sentence</emph> check box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155401" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="17">To stop drawing a line when you type three identical characters:</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155415" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="22">$[officename] automatically draws a line when you type three of the following characters and press Enter: - _ = * ~ #</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155439" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="19">Choose <emph>Tools - AutoCorrect</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155463" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="20">Click the <emph>Options</emph> tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155488" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="27">Clear the <emph>Apply border</emph> check box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp#autotext"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp#number_date_conv"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp index 2546c765c2..49f0022236 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,64 +52,64 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguideauto_spellcheckxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Automatically Check Spelling</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-03T15:28:36">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideauto_spellcheckxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Automatically Check Spelling</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-03T15:28:36">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3154265"><bookmark_value>spellcheck; automatic</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>automatic spellcheck</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>checking the spelling</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>spellcheck; disabling</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>text; without spellcheck</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3154265"><bookmark_value>spellcheck; automatic</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>automatic spellcheck</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>checking the spelling</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>spellcheck; disabling</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>text; without spellcheck</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>words; disabling spellcheck</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3154265" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="31"><variable id="auto_spellcheck"><link href="text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp" name="Automatically Check Spelling">Automatically Check Spelling</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154664" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="5">You can have $[officename] automatically check spelling while you type and underline possible misspelt words with a red wavy line.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3154678" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="41">To check spelling automatically while you type:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155531" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="42">Choose <emph>Tools - Spellcheck - AutoSpellcheck</emph>, or click the <emph>AutoSpellcheck On/Off </emph>icon on the <emph>Main Toolbar</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155569" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="33">Right-click a word with a red wavy underline, and then choose a suggested replacement word from the list, or from the <emph>AutoCorrect </emph>submenu.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147759" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="6">If you choose a word from the <emph>AutoCorrect</emph> submenu, the underlined word and the replacement word are automatically added to the <emph>AutoCorrect</emph> list for the current language. To view the <emph>AutoCorrect</emph> list, choose <emph>Tools - AutoCorrect/AutoFormat</emph>, and then click the <emph>Replace</emph> tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147819" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="7">You can also add the underlined word to your custom dictionary by choosing <emph>Add</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3147220" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="32">To exclude words from the spellcheck:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147263" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="35">Select the words that you want to exclude.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147282" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="36">Right-click and choose<emph> Character</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145602" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="38">Click the <emph>Font</emph> tab, and then select <emph>[None]</emph> in the <emph>Language </emph>box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145648" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="40"><link href="text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp" name="Creating a new dictionary.">Creating a new dictionary.</link></paragraph>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp#autocorr_except"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp#spellcheck_dialog"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154664" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="5">You can have $[officename] automatically check spelling while you type and underline possible misspelt words with a red wavy line.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3154678" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="41">To check spelling automatically while you type:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155531" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="42">Choose <emph>Tools - Spellcheck - AutoSpellcheck</emph>, or click the <emph>AutoSpellcheck On/Off </emph>icon on the <emph>Main Toolbar</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155569" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="33">Right-click a word with a red wavy underline, and then choose a suggested replacement word from the list, or from the <emph>AutoCorrect </emph>submenu.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147759" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="6">If you choose a word from the <emph>AutoCorrect</emph> submenu, the underlined word and the replacement word are automatically added to the <emph>AutoCorrect</emph> list for the current language. To view the <emph>AutoCorrect</emph> list, choose <emph>Tools - AutoCorrect/AutoFormat</emph>, and then click the <emph>Replace</emph> tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147819" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="7">You can also add the underlined word to your custom dictionary by choosing <emph>Add</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3147220" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="32">To exclude words from the spellcheck:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147263" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="35">Select the words that you want to exclude.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147282" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="36">Right-click and choose<emph> Character</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145602" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="38">Click the <emph>Font</emph> tab, and then select <emph>[None]</emph> in the <emph>Language </emph>box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145648" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="40"><link href="text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp" name="Creating a new dictionary.">Creating a new dictionary.</link></paragraph> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp#autocorr_except"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp#spellcheck_dialog"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp index 0202bbac4f..ca514f0f83 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,46 +52,46 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguideautocorr_exceptxml" indexer="exclude" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Adding Exceptions to the AutoCorrect List</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-17T15:13:15">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideautocorr_exceptxml" indexer="exclude" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Adding Exceptions to the AutoCorrect List</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-17T15:13:15">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3152887"><bookmark_value>AutoCorrect function; adding exceptions</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3152887"><bookmark_value>AutoCorrect function; adding exceptions</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>exceptions; AutoCorrect function (guide)</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3152887" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="10"><variable id="autocorr_except"><link href="text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp" name="Adding Exceptions to the AutoCorrect List">Adding Exceptions to the AutoCorrect List</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154254" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="11">You can prevent AutoCorrect from correcting specific abbreviations or words that have mixed capital letters and lowercase letters. </paragraph>
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154254" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="11">You can prevent AutoCorrect from correcting specific abbreviations or words that have mixed capital letters and lowercase letters. </paragraph> <paragraph role="tip" id="par_id3144875" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="17">To quickly undo an AutoCorrect replacement, press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command -</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Z. This also adds the word or abbreviation that you typed to the AutoCorrect exceptions list.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155554" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="12">To add an exception to the AutoCorrect exceptions list</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155576" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="13">Choose <emph>Tools - AutoCorrect/AutoFormat</emph>, and then click the <emph>Exceptions </emph>tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147762" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="18">Do one of the following:</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147786" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="19">Type the abbreviation followed by a period in the <emph>Abbreviations (no subsequent capital) </emph>box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147812" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="20">Type the word in the <emph>Words with TWo INitial CApitals </emph>box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp#auto_spellcheck"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Z. This also adds the word or abbreviation that you typed to the AutoCorrect exceptions list.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155554" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="12">To add an exception to the AutoCorrect exceptions list</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155576" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="13">Choose <emph>Tools - AutoCorrect/AutoFormat</emph>, and then click the <emph>Exceptions </emph>tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147762" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="18">Do one of the following:</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147786" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="19">Type the abbreviation followed by a period in the <emph>Abbreviations (no subsequent capital) </emph>box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147812" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="20">Type the word in the <emph>Words with TWo INitial CApitals </emph>box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp#auto_spellcheck"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp index e2875c2ff0..61b8984a96 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,81 +52,81 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguideautotextxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Using AutoText</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-03T14:51:56">FPE: Deleted screenshot</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideautotextxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Using AutoText</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-03T14:51:56">FPE: Deleted screenshot</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155521"><bookmark_value>AutoText</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155521"><bookmark_value>AutoText</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>networks; AutoText in</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155521" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="26"><variable id="autotext"><link href="text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp" name="Using AutoText">Using AutoText</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150534" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="27">$[officename] Writer allows you to store text, text with graphics, tables, and fields as AutoText, so that you can quickly insert them in a document later on. If you want, you can also store formatted text.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155539" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="48">Creating an AutoText Entry</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155560" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="47">Select the text, text with graphics, table, or field that you want to save as an AutoText entry. A graphic can only be stored if it is anchored as a character and is preceded and followed by at least one text character.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155581" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="57">Choose<emph> Edit - AutoText</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147761" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="58">Select the category where you want to store the AutoText.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147779" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="59">Type a name that is a longer than four characters. This allows you to use the <emph>Display remainder of name as suggestion while typing</emph> AutoText option. If you want, you can modify the proposed shortcut.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147807" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="60">Click <emph>AutoText</emph>, and then choose <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3147282" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="39">Inserting an AutoText Entry</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145597" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="61">Click in your document where you want to insert an AutoText entry.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145615" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="28">Choose <link href="text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp" name="Edit - AutoText"><emph>Edit - AutoText</emph></link>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145644" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="38">Select the AutoText that you want to insert, and then click<emph> Insert</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145668" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="30">You can also type the shortcut for an AutoText entry, and then press F3, or long-click the <emph>Edit AutoText </emph>icon on the <emph>Main Toolbar</emph>, and then choose an AutoText entry. </paragraph>
-<paragraph role="tip" id="par_id3155090" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="43">To quickly enter a math formula, type "FN", and then press F3. If you insert more than one formula, the formulae are sequentially numbered. To insert dummy text, type "DT", and then press F3. </paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155115" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="45">Printing a List of AutoText Entries</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155136" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="44">Choose <emph>Tools - Macros - Macro</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155160" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="62">In the <emph>Macro from</emph> list, double-click "Gimmicks".</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3151277" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="63">Select "AutoText" and then click <emph>Run</emph>. A list of the current AutoText entries is generated in a separate text document.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3151304" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="64">Choose <emph>File - Print</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3151327" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="49">Using AutoText in Network Installations</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3151355" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="50">You can store AutoText entries in different directories on a network.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3151370" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="51">For example, you can store "read-only" AutoText entries for your company on a central server, and user-defined AutoText entries in a local directory.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3151390" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="52">To view the paths for the current AutoText directories, choose <emph>Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths</emph>, select <emph>AutoText</emph>, and then click <emph>Edit</emph>. </paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154960" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="53">Two directories are listed here. The first entry is on the server installation and the second entry is in the user directory. If there are two AutoText entries with the same name in both directories, the entry from the user directory is used.</paragraph>
-<section id="relatedtopics">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154995" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="42"><link href="text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp" name="Edit - AutoText">Edit - AutoText</link></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155012" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="46"><link href="text/shared/01/06040600.xhp" name="Word Completion">Word Completion</link></paragraph>
-</section>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150534" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="27">$[officename] Writer allows you to store text, text with graphics, tables, and fields as AutoText, so that you can quickly insert them in a document later on. If you want, you can also store formatted text.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155539" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="48">Creating an AutoText Entry</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155560" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="47">Select the text, text with graphics, table, or field that you want to save as an AutoText entry. A graphic can only be stored if it is anchored as a character and is preceded and followed by at least one text character.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155581" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="57">Choose<emph> Edit - AutoText</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147761" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="58">Select the category where you want to store the AutoText.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147779" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="59">Type a name that is a longer than four characters. This allows you to use the <emph>Display remainder of name as suggestion while typing</emph> AutoText option. If you want, you can modify the proposed shortcut.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147807" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="60">Click <emph>AutoText</emph>, and then choose <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3147282" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="39">Inserting an AutoText Entry</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145597" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="61">Click in your document where you want to insert an AutoText entry.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145615" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="28">Choose <link href="text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp" name="Edit - AutoText"><emph>Edit - AutoText</emph></link>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145644" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="38">Select the AutoText that you want to insert, and then click<emph> Insert</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145668" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="30">You can also type the shortcut for an AutoText entry, and then press F3, or long-click the <emph>Edit AutoText </emph>icon on the <emph>Main Toolbar</emph>, and then choose an AutoText entry. </paragraph> +<paragraph role="tip" id="par_id3155090" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="43">To quickly enter a math formula, type "FN", and then press F3. If you insert more than one formula, the formulae are sequentially numbered. To insert dummy text, type "DT", and then press F3. </paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155115" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="45">Printing a List of AutoText Entries</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155136" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="44">Choose <emph>Tools - Macros - Macro</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155160" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="62">In the <emph>Macro from</emph> list, double-click "Gimmicks".</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3151277" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="63">Select "AutoText" and then click <emph>Run</emph>. A list of the current AutoText entries is generated in a separate text document.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3151304" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="64">Choose <emph>File - Print</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3151327" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="49">Using AutoText in Network Installations</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3151355" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="50">You can store AutoText entries in different directories on a network.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3151370" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="51">For example, you can store "read-only" AutoText entries for your company on a central server, and user-defined AutoText entries in a local directory.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3151390" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="52">To view the paths for the current AutoText directories, choose <emph>Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths</emph>, select <emph>AutoText</emph>, and then click <emph>Edit</emph>. </paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154960" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="53">Two directories are listed here. The first entry is on the server installation and the second entry is in the user directory. If there are two AutoText entries with the same name in both directories, the entry from the user directory is used.</paragraph> +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154995" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="42"><link href="text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp" name="Edit - AutoText">Edit - AutoText</link></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155012" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="46"><link href="text/shared/01/06040600.xhp" name="Word Completion">Word Completion</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp index 879ef4d761..c365a949db 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,64 +52,64 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguidecalculate_intablexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Calculating Cell Totals in Tables</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T12:02:16">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidecalculate_intablexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Calculating Cell Totals in Tables</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T12:02:16">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147400"><bookmark_value>calculating; in text tables</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>totals in text tables</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>text tables; calculating</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147400"><bookmark_value>calculating; in text tables</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>totals in text tables</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>text tables; calculating</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>tables; calculating</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3147400" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="3"><variable id="calculate_intable"><link href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp" name="Calculating Cell Totals in Tables">Calculating Cell Totals in Tables</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154243" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="4">Choose <emph>Insert - Table</emph>, and insert a table with one column and more than one row into a text document.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154203" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="5">Type a number in each cell of the column, but leave the last cell in the column empty.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154222" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="6">Place the cursor in the last cell of the column, and then click the <emph>Sum</emph> icon on the <emph>Table Object Bar</emph>.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3146880" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="7">The<emph> Formula Bar</emph> appears, and $[officename] inserts a formula for calculating the sum of the values in the current column. Individual cells are separated by a vertical slash |.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150507" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="8">If the formula is correct, press Enter, or click <emph>Apply</emph> in the Formula bar. The sum of the values in the current column is entered in the cell.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150533" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="10">If you enter a different numbers anywhere in the column, the sum is automatically updated.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155533" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="11">Similarly, you can also quickly calculate the sum of a row of numbers.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155547" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="12">To calculate the sum of a series of table cells:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155571" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="13">Click in a blank cell in the table.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155588" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="14">On the <emph>Formula Bar</emph>, click the <emph>Sum </emph>icon.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147775" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="15">Click in the first cell of the series, drag to the final cell, and then release.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147794" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="16">Press <emph>Enter</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/main0214.xhp#releistename"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp#calculate"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp#calculate_intext"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp#calculate_clipboard"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp#calculate_multitable"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</variable></paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154243" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="4">Choose <emph>Insert - Table</emph>, and insert a table with one column and more than one row into a text document.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154203" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="5">Type a number in each cell of the column, but leave the last cell in the column empty.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154222" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="6">Place the cursor in the last cell of the column, and then click the <emph>Sum</emph> icon on the <emph>Table Object Bar</emph>.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3146880" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="7">The<emph> Formula Bar</emph> appears, and $[officename] inserts a formula for calculating the sum of the values in the current column. Individual cells are separated by a vertical slash |.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150507" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="8">If the formula is correct, press Enter, or click <emph>Apply</emph> in the Formula bar. The sum of the values in the current column is entered in the cell.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150533" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="10">If you enter a different numbers anywhere in the column, the sum is automatically updated.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155533" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="11">Similarly, you can also quickly calculate the sum of a row of numbers.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155547" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="12">To calculate the sum of a series of table cells:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155571" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="13">Click in a blank cell in the table.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155588" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="14">On the <emph>Formula Bar</emph>, click the <emph>Sum </emph>icon.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147775" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="15">Click in the first cell of the series, drag to the final cell, and then release.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147794" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="16">Press <emph>Enter</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/main0214.xhp#releistename"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp#calculate"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp#calculate_intext"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp#calculate_clipboard"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp#calculate_multitable"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp index 9bf34a8020..bfc27ad593 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,48 +52,48 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguidecalculate_intextxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-03T15:20:01">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidecalculate_intextxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-03T15:20:01">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147406"><bookmark_value>calculating;complex formulas in text</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147406"><bookmark_value>calculating;complex formulas in text</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>formulas; complex formulas in text</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3147406" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="20"><variable id="calculate_intext"><link href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp" name="Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents">Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145245" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="25">You can use predefined functions in a formula, and then insert the result of the calculation into a text document.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3152901" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="26">For example, to calculate the mean value of three numbers, do the following:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145078" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="27">Click in the document where you want to insert the formula, and then press F2.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156382" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="28">Click the <emph>Formula </emph>icon, and choose "Mean" from the list.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149692" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="30">Type the first number, followed by a vertical slash (|), and repeat for the second and third numbers.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149481" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="32">Press <emph>Enter</emph>. The result is inserted as a field into the document.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149823" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="35">To edit the formula, double-click the field in the document.</paragraph>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp#calculate_intext2"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/main0214.xhp#releistename"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp#calculate"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp#calculate_clipboard"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp#calculate_intable"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp#calculate_multitable"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145245" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="25">You can use predefined functions in a formula, and then insert the result of the calculation into a text document.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3152901" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="26">For example, to calculate the mean value of three numbers, do the following:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145078" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="27">Click in the document where you want to insert the formula, and then press F2.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156382" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="28">Click the <emph>Formula </emph>icon, and choose "Mean" from the list.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149692" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="30">Type the first number, followed by a vertical slash (|), and repeat for the second and third numbers.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149481" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="32">Press <emph>Enter</emph>. The result is inserted as a field into the document.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149823" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="35">To edit the formula, double-click the field in the document.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp#calculate_intext2"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/main0214.xhp#releistename"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp#calculate"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp#calculate_clipboard"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp#calculate_intable"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp#calculate_multitable"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp index c6d6f41523..137ed1836d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,88 +52,88 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguidechapter_numberingxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Outline Numbering</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T09:53:23">FPE: Deleted a screenshot</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidechapter_numberingxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Outline Numbering</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T09:53:23">FPE: Deleted a screenshot</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147682"><bookmark_value>outline; numbering</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>headings; numbering</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147682"><bookmark_value>outline; numbering</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>headings; numbering</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>headings; own Paragraph Styles</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3147682" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="22"><variable id="chapter_numbering"><link href="text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp" name="Outline Numbering">Outline Numbering</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155605" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="23">You can modify the heading hierarchy or assign a level in the hierarchy to a custom paragraph style. You can also also add chapter and section numbering to heading paragraph styles. By default, the "Heading 1" paragraph style is at the top of the outline hierarchy.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155626" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="35">To add automatic numbering to a heading style:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154255" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="36">Choose <emph>Tools - Outline Numbering</emph>, and then click the <emph>Numbering </emph>tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155891" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="37">In the <emph>Paragraph Style </emph>box, select the heading style that you want to add a chapter number to.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150513" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="25">In the<emph> Numbers</emph> box, select the numbering style that you want to use, and then click<emph> OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155552" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="26">To use a custom paragraph style as a heading:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155571" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="38">Choose <emph>Tools - Outline Numbering</emph>, and then click the <emph>Numbering </emph>tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147758" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="27">Select the custom style in the <emph>Paragraph Style</emph> box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147782" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="39">Click the heading level that you want to assign to the custom paragraph style in the<emph> Level</emph> list. </paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147808" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="28">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3147831" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="40">To rearrange the headings in a text document:</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3147221" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="24">You can quickly rearrange the heading order, or change the heading hierarchy in a text document by using the <link href="text/swriter/01/02110000.xhp" name="Navigator">Navigator</link>. You can choose to include or exclude the subordinate text of a heading when you reorder the hierarchy.</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145620" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="41">Open an existing text document.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145636" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="42">On the <emph>Function Bar</emph>, click the <emph>Navigator </emph>icon.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145667" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="43">Do one of the following:</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3151199" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="31">To change the order of a heading, drag the heading to a different location in the list.</paragraph><comment>The following icons are in
-sw/imglist/sc20171-4.png</comment>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3151218" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="44">To move a heading down one level in the hierarchy, click the <emph>Demote Level </emph>icon.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3151244" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="45">To move a heading up one level in the hierarchy, click the <emph>Promote Level </emph>icon.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155932" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="46">To move a heading to the beginning of the document, click the <emph>Promote Chapter </emph>icon.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155957" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="47">To move a heading to the end of the document, click the <emph>Demote Chapter </emph>icon.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155981" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="32">The numbering of affected headings is automatically updated.</paragraph>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp#insert_tab_innumbering"/>
-</body>
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155605" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="23">You can modify the heading hierarchy or assign a level in the hierarchy to a custom paragraph style. You can also also add chapter and section numbering to heading paragraph styles. By default, the "Heading 1" paragraph style is at the top of the outline hierarchy.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155626" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="35">To add automatic numbering to a heading style:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154255" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="36">Choose <emph>Tools - Outline Numbering</emph>, and then click the <emph>Numbering </emph>tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155891" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="37">In the <emph>Paragraph Style </emph>box, select the heading style that you want to add a chapter number to.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150513" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="25">In the<emph> Numbers</emph> box, select the numbering style that you want to use, and then click<emph> OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155552" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="26">To use a custom paragraph style as a heading:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155571" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="38">Choose <emph>Tools - Outline Numbering</emph>, and then click the <emph>Numbering </emph>tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147758" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="27">Select the custom style in the <emph>Paragraph Style</emph> box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147782" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="39">Click the heading level that you want to assign to the custom paragraph style in the<emph> Level</emph> list. </paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147808" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="28">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3147831" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="40">To rearrange the headings in a text document:</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3147221" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="24">You can quickly rearrange the heading order, or change the heading hierarchy in a text document by using the <link href="text/swriter/01/02110000.xhp" name="Navigator">Navigator</link>. You can choose to include or exclude the subordinate text of a heading when you reorder the hierarchy.</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145620" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="41">Open an existing text document.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145636" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="42">On the <emph>Function Bar</emph>, click the <emph>Navigator </emph>icon.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145667" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="43">Do one of the following:</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3151199" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="31">To change the order of a heading, drag the heading to a different location in the list.</paragraph><comment>The following icons are in +sw/imglist/sc20171-4.png</comment> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3151218" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="44">To move a heading down one level in the hierarchy, click the <emph>Demote Level </emph>icon.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3151244" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="45">To move a heading up one level in the hierarchy, click the <emph>Promote Level </emph>icon.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155932" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="46">To move a heading to the beginning of the document, click the <emph>Promote Chapter </emph>icon.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155957" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="47">To move a heading to the end of the document, click the <emph>Demote Chapter </emph>icon.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155981" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="32">The numbering of affected headings is automatically updated.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp#insert_tab_innumbering"/> +</body> </helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp index d54e293b52..ec9a0dc52e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,117 +52,117 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguideconditional_textxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Conditional Text</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T09:25:01">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideconditional_textxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Conditional Text</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T09:25:01">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155619"><bookmark_value>matching conditional text in fields</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>if-then queries as fields</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>conditional text; setting up</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155619"><bookmark_value>matching conditional text in fields</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>if-then queries as fields</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>conditional text; setting up</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>text; conditional text</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155619" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="4"><variable id="conditional_text"><link href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp" name="Conditional Text">Conditional Text</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155879" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="5">You can set up fields in your document that display text when a condition that you define is met. For example, you can define the conditional text that is displayed in a series of reminder letters.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155895" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="6">Setting up conditional text in this example is a two-part process. First you create a variable, and then you create the condition.</paragraph>
-<table id="tbl_id3150508">
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155879" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="5">You can set up fields in your document that display text when a condition that you define is met. For example, you can define the conditional text that is displayed in a series of reminder letters.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155895" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="6">Setting up conditional text in this example is a two-part process. First you create a variable, and then you create the condition.</paragraph> +<table id="tbl_id3150508"> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150532" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="E"> <image id="img_id3150543" src="res/helpimg/mahn1.png" width="138.38mm" height="109.8mm"><alt id="alt_id3150543" xml-lang="en-US">Fields / Variables</alt> - </image></paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-</table>
-
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3153175" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="61">To define a conditional variable:</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153185" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="62">The first part of the example is to define a variable for the condition statement. </paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155545" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="7">Type "Reminder" in your document, and then add space.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155566" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="8">Choose <emph>Insert -</emph>
-<emph>Fields - Other</emph>, and then click the <emph>Variables</emph> tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147759" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="9">Click "Set variable" in the <emph>Type </emph>list.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147784" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="10">Type a name for the variable in the <emph>Name</emph> box, for example "Reminder".</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147810" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="57">Click "Text" in the<emph> Format</emph> list.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="tip" id="par_id3147290" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="56">To display integers, click the "-1234" format.</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered" startwith="6">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145614" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="11">Enter "1" in the <emph>Value</emph> box, and then click <emph>Insert</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3145645" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="63">To define a condition and the conditional text:</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145659" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="64">The second part of the example is to define the condition that must be met, and to insert a placeholder for displaying the conditional text in your document.</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3151193" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="12">Place the cursor where you want to insert the conditional text in your text.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3151212" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="65">Choose <emph>Insert -</emph>
-<emph>Fields - Other</emph>, and then click the <emph>Functions</emph> tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3151250" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="13">Click "Conditional text" in the <emph>Type </emph>list.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155936" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="14">Type <emph>Reminder EQ "3"</emph> in the <emph>Condition </emph>box. In other words, the conditional text will be displayed when the variable in the field that you defined in the first part of this example is equal to three.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155969" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="15">The quotation marks enclosing the number 3 indicates that the variable that you defined in the first part of this example is a text string. For a list of operators that you can use when defining your condition, see the Related Topics section of this page.</paragraph>
-<table id="tbl_id3155987">
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
+ </image></paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +</table> + +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3153175" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="61">To define a conditional variable:</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153185" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="62">The first part of the example is to define a variable for the condition statement. </paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155545" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="7">Type "Reminder" in your document, and then add space.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155566" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="8">Choose <emph>Insert -</emph> +<emph>Fields - Other</emph>, and then click the <emph>Variables</emph> tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147759" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="9">Click "Set variable" in the <emph>Type </emph>list.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147784" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="10">Type a name for the variable in the <emph>Name</emph> box, for example "Reminder".</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147810" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="57">Click "Text" in the<emph> Format</emph> list.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="tip" id="par_id3147290" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="56">To display integers, click the "-1234" format.</paragraph> +<list type="ordered" startwith="6"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145614" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="11">Enter "1" in the <emph>Value</emph> box, and then click <emph>Insert</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3145645" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="63">To define a condition and the conditional text:</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145659" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="64">The second part of the example is to define the condition that must be met, and to insert a placeholder for displaying the conditional text in your document.</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3151193" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="12">Place the cursor where you want to insert the conditional text in your text.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3151212" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="65">Choose <emph>Insert -</emph> +<emph>Fields - Other</emph>, and then click the <emph>Functions</emph> tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3151250" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="13">Click "Conditional text" in the <emph>Type </emph>list.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155936" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="14">Type <emph>Reminder EQ "3"</emph> in the <emph>Condition </emph>box. In other words, the conditional text will be displayed when the variable in the field that you defined in the first part of this example is equal to three.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155969" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="15">The quotation marks enclosing the number 3 indicates that the variable that you defined in the first part of this example is a text string. For a list of operators that you can use when defining your condition, see the Related Topics section of this page.</paragraph> +<table id="tbl_id3155987"> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3156012" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="E"> <image id="img_id3156019" src="res/helpimg/mahn2.png" width="138.38mm" height="109.8mm"><alt id="alt_id3156019" xml-lang="en-US">Fields / Functions</alt> - </image></paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-</table>
-
-<list type="ordered" startwith="5">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150446" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="16">Type the text that you want to display when the condition is met in the <emph>Then</emph> box. There is no limit to the length of the text that you can enter. If you want, you can even copy and paste a paragraph into this box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150473" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="17">Click <emph>Insert</emph>, and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155073" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="66">To display the conditional text:</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155086" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="67">In this example, the conditional text is displayed when the value of the conditional variable is equal to 3.</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155110" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="19">Place your cursor in front of the field that you defined in the first part of this example, and then choose <emph>Edit - Fields</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155136" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="68">Replace the number in the <emph>Value </emph>box with "3", and then click<emph> Close</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155168" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="20">If the field does not automatically update, press F9.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp#fields_userdata"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp#conditional_text2"/>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145714" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="C"><link href="text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp" name="List of conditional operators">List of conditional operators</link></paragraph>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+ </image></paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +</table> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="5"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150446" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="16">Type the text that you want to display when the condition is met in the <emph>Then</emph> box. There is no limit to the length of the text that you can enter. If you want, you can even copy and paste a paragraph into this box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150473" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="17">Click <emph>Insert</emph>, and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155073" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="66">To display the conditional text:</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155086" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="67">In this example, the conditional text is displayed when the value of the conditional variable is equal to 3.</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155110" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="19">Place your cursor in front of the field that you defined in the first part of this example, and then choose <emph>Edit - Fields</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155136" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="68">Replace the number in the <emph>Value </emph>box with "3", and then click<emph> Close</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155168" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="20">If the field does not automatically update, press F9.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp#fields_userdata"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp#conditional_text2"/> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145714" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="C"><link href="text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp" name="List of conditional operators">List of conditional operators</link></paragraph> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp index e4ef411fbb..efbba4984b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,54 +52,54 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguideconditional_text2xml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Conditional Text for Page Counts</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T09:56:56">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideconditional_text2xml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Conditional Text for Page Counts</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T09:56:56">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3153108"><bookmark_value>page counts</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3153108"><bookmark_value>page counts</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>conditional text;page counts</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3153108" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="conditional_text2"><link href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp" name="Conditional Text for Page Counts">Conditional Text for Page Counts</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3156228" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="3">You can create a conditional text field that displays the word "pages" instead of "page" in conjunction with a page count field if your document contains more than one page.</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156257" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="4">Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the page count.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150513" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="5">Choose <emph>Insert - Field - Page Count</emph>, and then enter a space.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150537" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="6">Choose <emph>Insert - Field - Other</emph>, and then click the <emph>Functions</emph> tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153166" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="9">Click "Conditional text" in the <emph>Type </emph>list.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145256" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="7">Type "Page > 1" in the <emph>Condition</emph> box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145280" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="10">Type "Pages" in the <emph>Then</emph> box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145305" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="11">Type "Page" in the <emph>Otherwise</emph> box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155535" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="8">Click <emph>Insert</emph>, and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp#conditional_text"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp#fields"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3156228" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="3">You can create a conditional text field that displays the word "pages" instead of "page" in conjunction with a page count field if your document contains more than one page.</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156257" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="4">Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the page count.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150513" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="5">Choose <emph>Insert - Field - Page Count</emph>, and then enter a space.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150537" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="6">Choose <emph>Insert - Field - Other</emph>, and then click the <emph>Functions</emph> tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153166" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="9">Click "Conditional text" in the <emph>Type </emph>list.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145256" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="7">Type "Page > 1" in the <emph>Condition</emph> box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145280" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="10">Type "Pages" in the <emph>Then</emph> box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145305" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="11">Type "Page" in the <emph>Otherwise</emph> box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155535" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="8">Click <emph>Insert</emph>, and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp#conditional_text"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp#fields"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp index 0f922a44cc..ec71a66da0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,80 +52,80 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguideeven_odd_sdwxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T10:56:03">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideeven_odd_sdwxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T10:56:03">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3153407"><bookmark_value>page styles; left and right pages</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>pages; left and right pages</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>formatting; page styles</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>title pages; page styles</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>first page;page styles</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>left page; page styles</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3153407"><bookmark_value>page styles; left and right pages</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>pages; left and right pages</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>formatting; page styles</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>title pages; page styles</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>first page;page styles</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>left page; page styles</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>right pages</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3153407" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="even_odd_sdw"><link href="text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp" name="Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages">Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<table id="tbl_id3152897">
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
+</variable></paragraph> +<table id="tbl_id3152897"> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154265" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="E"> <image id="img_id3155876" src="res/sc05539.png" width="5.64mm" height="5.64mm"><alt id="alt_id3155876" xml-lang="en-US">Icon</alt> - </image></paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3147126" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="2">$[officename] can automatically apply alternating page styles on even (left) and odd pages (right) in your document. For example, you can use page styles to display different headers and footers on even and odd pages. The current page style is displayed in the <emph>Status Bar</emph> at the bottom of the workplace.</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-</table>
-
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150526" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="4">Choose <emph>Format - Stylist</emph>, and then click the <emph>Page Styles </emph>icon.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153153" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="6">In the list of page styles, right-click "Left Page" and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153179" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="8">Click the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145267" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="17">Select "Right Page" in the <emph>Next Style</emph> box, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145299" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="9">In the list of page styles, right-click "Right Page" and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155529" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="18">Select "Left Page" in the <emph>Next Style</emph> box, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155561" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="10">Go to the first page in your document, and double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles in the Stylist.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155588" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="19">To add a header to one of the page styles, choose<emph> Insert - Header</emph>, and choose the page style that you want to add the header to. In the header frame, type the text that you want to use as the header.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147772" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="20">To add a footer to one of the page styles, choose<emph> Insert - Footer</emph>, and choose the page style that you want to add the footer to. In the footer frame, type the text that you want to use as a footer.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="tip" id="par_id3147254" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="12">If you want do not want to have a header or a footer on the title page of your document, apply the "First Page" style to the title page.</paragraph>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp#pagestyles"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145596" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="13"><link href="text/swriter/01/04010000.xhp" name="Insert Break dialog">Insert Break dialog</link></paragraph>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+ </image></paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3147126" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="2">$[officename] can automatically apply alternating page styles on even (left) and odd pages (right) in your document. For example, you can use page styles to display different headers and footers on even and odd pages. The current page style is displayed in the <emph>Status Bar</emph> at the bottom of the workplace.</paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +</table> + +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150526" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="4">Choose <emph>Format - Stylist</emph>, and then click the <emph>Page Styles </emph>icon.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153153" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="6">In the list of page styles, right-click "Left Page" and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153179" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="8">Click the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145267" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="17">Select "Right Page" in the <emph>Next Style</emph> box, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145299" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="9">In the list of page styles, right-click "Right Page" and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155529" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="18">Select "Left Page" in the <emph>Next Style</emph> box, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155561" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="10">Go to the first page in your document, and double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles in the Stylist.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155588" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="19">To add a header to one of the page styles, choose<emph> Insert - Header</emph>, and choose the page style that you want to add the header to. In the header frame, type the text that you want to use as the header.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147772" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="20">To add a footer to one of the page styles, choose<emph> Insert - Footer</emph>, and choose the page style that you want to add the footer to. In the footer frame, type the text that you want to use as a footer.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="tip" id="par_id3147254" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="12">If you want do not want to have a header or a footer on the title page of your document, apply the "First Page" style to the title page.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp#pagestyles"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145596" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="13"><link href="text/swriter/01/04010000.xhp" name="Insert Break dialog">Insert Break dialog</link></paragraph> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp index 2527f0ce26..a549939471 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,49 +52,49 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguidefooter_pagenumberxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting Page Numbers in Footers</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T09:49:31">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidefooter_pagenumberxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting Page Numbers in Footers</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T09:49:31">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155624"><bookmark_value>footers; with page numbers</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>pages; numbers and count of</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155624"><bookmark_value>footers; with page numbers</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>pages; numbers and count of</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>page numbers; footers</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155624" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="footer_pagenumber"><link href="text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp" name="Inserting Page Numbers in Footers">Inserting Page Numbers in Footers</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150508" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="2">Choose <emph>Insert - Footer</emph> and select the page style that you want to add the footer to.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150534" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="3">Choose <emph>Insert - Fields - Page Number</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153155" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="4">If you want, you can align the Page Number field as you would text.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153169" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="5">You can also add a page count to the footer, for example, in the form "Page 9 of 12":</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155532" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="6">Click in front of the Page Number field and type "Page ", click after the field, enter a space and then type "of ".</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155554" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="7">Choose <emph>Insert - Fields - Page Count</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp#even_odd_sdw"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</variable></paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150508" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="2">Choose <emph>Insert - Footer</emph> and select the page style that you want to add the footer to.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150534" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="3">Choose <emph>Insert - Fields - Page Number</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153155" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="4">If you want, you can align the Page Number field as you would text.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153169" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="5">You can also add a page count to the footer, for example, in the form "Page 9 of 12":</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155532" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="6">Click in front of the Page Number field and type "Page ", click after the field, enter a space and then type "of ".</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155554" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="7">Choose <emph>Insert - Fields - Page Count</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp#even_odd_sdw"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp index f242c0850f..794ae42691 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,119 +52,119 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguidefootnote_usagexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T09:48:36">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidefootnote_usagexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T09:48:36">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145819"><bookmark_value>endnotes;editing</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>inserting;footnotes</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>endnotes;inserting</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>inserting;endnotes</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>deleting;footnotes</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>removing;footnotes</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>editing;footnotes</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>navigation;footnotes</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145819"><bookmark_value>endnotes;editing</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>inserting;footnotes</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>endnotes;inserting</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>inserting;endnotes</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>deleting;footnotes</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>removing;footnotes</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>editing;footnotes</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>navigation;footnotes</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>organizing footnotes</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3145819" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="16"><variable id="footnote_usage"><link href="text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp" name="Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes">Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154258" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="14">Footnotes reference more information about a topic at the bottom of a page and endnotes reference information at the end of the document. $[officename] automatically numbers the footnotes that you insert in your document.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155881" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="24">To insert a footnote or endnote:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155903" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="25">Click in your document where you want to place the anchor of the note.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147120" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="26">Choose <link href="text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp" name="Insert - Footnote"><emph>Insert - Footnote</emph></link>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150937" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="34">In the <emph>Numbering </emph>area, select the format that you want to use. If you select <emph>Character</emph>, click the browse button (<emph>...</emph>) and select the character that you want to use for the footnote.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150508" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="35">In the <emph>Type </emph>area, select <emph>Footnote </emph>or <emph>Endnote</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150704" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="36">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150729" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="37">Type the note.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<table id="tbl_id3150745">
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154258" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="14">Footnotes reference more information about a topic at the bottom of a page and endnotes reference information at the end of the document. $[officename] automatically numbers the footnotes that you insert in your document.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155881" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="24">To insert a footnote or endnote:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155903" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="25">Click in your document where you want to place the anchor of the note.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147120" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="26">Choose <link href="text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp" name="Insert - Footnote"><emph>Insert - Footnote</emph></link>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150937" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="34">In the <emph>Numbering </emph>area, select the format that you want to use. If you select <emph>Character</emph>, click the browse button (<emph>...</emph>) and select the character that you want to use for the footnote.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150508" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="35">In the <emph>Type </emph>area, select <emph>Footnote </emph>or <emph>Endnote</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150704" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="36">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150729" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="37">Type the note.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<table id="tbl_id3150745"> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3148843" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="E"> <image id="img_id3148857" src="res/commandimagelist/sc_insertfootnote.png" width="5.64mm" height="5.64mm"><alt id="alt_id3148857" xml-lang="en-US">Icon</alt> - </image></paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153176" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="27">You can also insert footnotes or endnotes by long-clicking the <emph>Insert </emph>icon on the <emph>Main Toolbar</emph> and clicking the <emph>Insert Footnote Directly</emph> icon.</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-</table>
-
-<paragraph role="note" id="par_id3145319" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="5">On pages that use a multiple column layout, the footnote is at the base of the column that contains the footnote anchor.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155543" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="28">Editing Footnotes or Endnotes</paragraph>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155563" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="29">To edit the text of a footnote or endnote, click in the note, or click the anchor for the note in the text.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<table id="tbl_id3155582">
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
+ </image></paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153176" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="27">You can also insert footnotes or endnotes by long-clicking the <emph>Insert </emph>icon on the <emph>Main Toolbar</emph> and clicking the <emph>Insert Footnote Directly</emph> icon.</paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +</table> + +<paragraph role="note" id="par_id3145319" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="5">On pages that use a multiple column layout, the footnote is at the base of the column that contains the footnote anchor.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155543" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="28">Editing Footnotes or Endnotes</paragraph> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155563" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="29">To edit the text of a footnote or endnote, click in the note, or click the anchor for the note in the text.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<table id="tbl_id3155582"> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150119" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="E"> <image id="img_id3150126" src="res/helpimg/refhand.png" width="8.47mm" height="8.47mm"><alt id="alt_id3150126" xml-lang="en-US">Mouse hand cursor</alt> - </image></paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150167" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="6">The mouse pointer changes to a hand when you rest it over a footnote or endnote anchor in your document.</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-</table>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145029" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="40">To change the format of a footnote, click in the footnote, press F11 to open the Stylist, right-click "Footnote" in the list, and then choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145062" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="30">To jump from the footnote or endnote text to the note anchor in the text, press PgUp.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145081" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="4">To edit the numbering properties of a footnote or endnote anchor, click in front of the anchor, and choose <link href="text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp" name="Edit - Footnote"><emph>Edit - Footnote</emph></link>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
+ </image></paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150167" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="6">The mouse pointer changes to a hand when you rest it over a footnote or endnote anchor in your document.</paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +</table> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145029" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="40">To change the format of a footnote, click in the footnote, press F11 to open the Stylist, right-click "Footnote" in the list, and then choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145062" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="30">To jump from the footnote or endnote text to the note anchor in the text, press PgUp.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145081" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="4">To edit the numbering properties of a footnote or endnote anchor, click in front of the anchor, and choose <link href="text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp" name="Edit - Footnote"><emph>Edit - Footnote</emph></link>.</paragraph> +</listitem> <listitem> <bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147776"><bookmark_value>footnotes; general settings</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147776" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="3">To change the formatting that $[officename] applies to footnotes and endnotes, choose <link href="text/swriter/01/06080000.xhp" name="Tools - Footnotes"><emph>Tools - Footnotes</emph></link>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147813" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="15">To edit the properties of the text area for footnotes or endnotes, choose <emph>Format - Page</emph>, and then click the <link href="text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp" name="Footnote"><emph>Footnote</emph></link> tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147232" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="41">To remove a footnote, delete the footnote anchor in the text.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp#footnote_with_line"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</bookmark> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147776" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="3">To change the formatting that $[officename] applies to footnotes and endnotes, choose <link href="text/swriter/01/06080000.xhp" name="Tools - Footnotes"><emph>Tools - Footnotes</emph></link>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147813" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="15">To edit the properties of the text area for footnotes or endnotes, choose <emph>Format - Page</emph>, and then click the <link href="text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp" name="Footnote"><emph>Footnote</emph></link> tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147232" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="41">To remove a footnote, delete the footnote anchor in the text.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp#footnote_with_line"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp index 2161c69229..0cb7c527ab 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,123 +52,123 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguideform_letters_mainxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Creating a Form Letter</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T09:21:29">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideform_letters_mainxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Creating a Form Letter</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T09:21:29">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3159257"><bookmark_value>form letters</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>mail merge</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3159257"><bookmark_value>form letters</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>mail merge</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>letters; creating form letters</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3159257" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="29"><variable id="form_letters"><variable id="form_letters_main"><link href="text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp" name="Creating a Form Letter">Creating a Form Letter</link> </variable> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150502" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="1">To create a form letter, you require a template document that contains one or more placeholders, and access to a data source. Creating a form letter is a three-step process:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150525" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="2">Creating a template document</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150543" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="3">Specifying a data source and inserting placeholders</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3146872" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="4">Printing or saving the output of a form letter</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3146889" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="5">Creating a Template Document</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150703" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="6">The template document for the form letter contains the text content of the letter and placeholders for data, such as the name of a recipient and addresses.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3150718" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="U" oldref="30">To create a template for a form letter:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150741" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="7">Do one of the following:</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153149" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="33">Choose <emph>File - New - Templates and Documents </emph>and choose a <link href="text/shared/01/01010100.xhp" name="template">template</link>.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153177" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="31">Choose <emph>File - New - Text document</emph>.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147054" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="32">Choose <emph>File - Open</emph> and select the text document that you want to use as form letter.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147080" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="8">Add or edit the letter content, and adjust the layout of the letter.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147099" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="9">Choose <emph>File - Save</emph>, but do not close the document.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3145274" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="10">Specifying a Data Source And Inserting Placeholders</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145288" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="11">The placeholder <link href="text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp" name="fields">fields</link> that you insert into your form letter are replaced with text from the data source when you print the letter.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145310" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="12">The first time you access one of the supplied form letter templates, you will automatically see the Address Data Source Wizard. After a few clicks, your preferred address book is registered with $[officename]. To manually register an address book, choose <emph>File - Wizard - </emph><link href="text/shared/autopi/01170000.xhp" name="Address Data Source"><emph>Address Data Source</emph></link> and follow the instructions. You only need to register an address book once.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155553" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="U" oldref="34">To insert placeholders from a data source into a form letter:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155576" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="13">Choose <emph>View - Data Sources</emph> or press F4. The <link href="text/shared/guide/database_main.xhp" name="Data Source browser">Data Source browser</link> opens at the top of the document window.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150113" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="14">In the left pane of the Data Source browser, double-click the data source that you want to use for your form letter.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150132" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="15">Double-click <emph>Tables</emph> to expand the list of tables for the data source.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150154" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="16">You can also use a <link href="text/shared/explorer/database/02010100.xhp" name="query">query</link> as a data source.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147755" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="17">Select the table name that contains the data that you want to use in your form letter. A list of the fields contained in the table appears in the right pane of the data source browser.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147775" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="18">Drag a <emph>column header</emph> for the field that you want to use as a placeholder to where you want it to appear in your form letter and release. Repeat this step for every field you want to add.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147799" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="19">You can also add placeholders from the <link href="text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp" name="Database tab"><emph>Database</emph> tab</link> in the <link href="text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp" name="Fields"><emph>Fields</emph></link> dialog.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155075" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="20">Choose <emph>File - Save</emph>, but do not close the document.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155097" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="21">Printing or Saving the Output of a Form Letter</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155111" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="22">The final steps in creating a form letter are to merge the template document with the data from the database, and output the letter.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155127" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="U" oldref="35">To specify the data to include in a form letter output:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155150" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="23">Choose <emph>Tools - Mail Merge </emph>to open the <link href="text/swriter/01/01150000.xhp" name="Mail Merge"><emph>Mail Merge</emph></link> dialog.<comment>changes galore...!!!</comment></paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147261" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="25">In the <emph>Records</emph> area, select the data range you want to include in the form letter.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147286" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="24">To only include a subset of the data in your form letter, ctrl-click the corresponding row headers. If you want, you can also <link href="text/shared/02/12090100.xhp" name="filter the data">filter the data</link> that you use in the form letter.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3145609" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="U" oldref="36">To print the output of a form letter:</paragraph>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145632" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="27">Select <emph>Printer </emph>in the <emph>Output</emph> area, and then click<emph> OK. </emph>The form letters are sent to the printer as one print job. If you want to send each form letter to the printer as a separate print job, select <emph>Single print jobs</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3151185" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="U" oldref="37">To save the output of a form letter:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3151208" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="28">Select <emph>File</emph> in the <emph>Output</emph> area.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3151239" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="38">Specify where you want to save the form letter files in the <emph>Path</emph> box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155926" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="39">Do one of the following:</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155940" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="40">Select a field to use for the file name in the <emph>Generate file name from</emph> box.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155961" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="41">Enter a name in the <emph>Manual setting</emph> text box. $[officename] automatically generates a sequence number and adds the number to the end of the file name. </paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155988" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="42">Click <emph>OK</emph>. A separate file is created for each form letter.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/shared/01/01010100.xhp#vor_und_dok"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp#fields"/>
-<embed href="text/shared/guide/data_addressbook.xhp#data_addressbook"/>
-<embed href="text/shared/guide/database_main.xhp#database_main"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150502" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="1">To create a form letter, you require a template document that contains one or more placeholders, and access to a data source. Creating a form letter is a three-step process:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150525" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="2">Creating a template document</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150543" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="3">Specifying a data source and inserting placeholders</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3146872" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="4">Printing or saving the output of a form letter</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3146889" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="5">Creating a Template Document</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150703" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="6">The template document for the form letter contains the text content of the letter and placeholders for data, such as the name of a recipient and addresses.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3150718" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="U" oldref="30">To create a template for a form letter:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150741" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="7">Do one of the following:</paragraph> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153149" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="33">Choose <emph>File - New - Templates and Documents </emph>and choose a <link href="text/shared/01/01010100.xhp" name="template">template</link>.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153177" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="31">Choose <emph>File - New - Text document</emph>.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147054" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="32">Choose <emph>File - Open</emph> and select the text document that you want to use as form letter.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147080" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="8">Add or edit the letter content, and adjust the layout of the letter.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147099" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="9">Choose <emph>File - Save</emph>, but do not close the document.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3145274" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="10">Specifying a Data Source And Inserting Placeholders</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145288" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="11">The placeholder <link href="text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp" name="fields">fields</link> that you insert into your form letter are replaced with text from the data source when you print the letter.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145310" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="12">The first time you access one of the supplied form letter templates, you will automatically see the Address Data Source Wizard. After a few clicks, your preferred address book is registered with $[officename]. To manually register an address book, choose <emph>File - Wizard - </emph><link href="text/shared/autopi/01170000.xhp" name="Address Data Source"><emph>Address Data Source</emph></link> and follow the instructions. You only need to register an address book once.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155553" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="U" oldref="34">To insert placeholders from a data source into a form letter:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155576" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="13">Choose <emph>View - Data Sources</emph> or press F4. The <link href="text/shared/guide/database_main.xhp" name="Data Source browser">Data Source browser</link> opens at the top of the document window.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150113" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="14">In the left pane of the Data Source browser, double-click the data source that you want to use for your form letter.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150132" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="15">Double-click <emph>Tables</emph> to expand the list of tables for the data source.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150154" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="16">You can also use a <link href="text/shared/explorer/database/02010100.xhp" name="query">query</link> as a data source.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147755" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="17">Select the table name that contains the data that you want to use in your form letter. A list of the fields contained in the table appears in the right pane of the data source browser.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147775" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="18">Drag a <emph>column header</emph> for the field that you want to use as a placeholder to where you want it to appear in your form letter and release. Repeat this step for every field you want to add.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147799" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="19">You can also add placeholders from the <link href="text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp" name="Database tab"><emph>Database</emph> tab</link> in the <link href="text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp" name="Fields"><emph>Fields</emph></link> dialog.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155075" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="20">Choose <emph>File - Save</emph>, but do not close the document.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155097" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="21">Printing or Saving the Output of a Form Letter</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155111" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="22">The final steps in creating a form letter are to merge the template document with the data from the database, and output the letter.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155127" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="U" oldref="35">To specify the data to include in a form letter output:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155150" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="23">Choose <emph>Tools - Mail Merge </emph>to open the <link href="text/swriter/01/01150000.xhp" name="Mail Merge"><emph>Mail Merge</emph></link> dialog.<comment>changes galore...!!!</comment></paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147261" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="25">In the <emph>Records</emph> area, select the data range you want to include in the form letter.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147286" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="24">To only include a subset of the data in your form letter, ctrl-click the corresponding row headers. If you want, you can also <link href="text/shared/02/12090100.xhp" name="filter the data">filter the data</link> that you use in the form letter.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3145609" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="U" oldref="36">To print the output of a form letter:</paragraph> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145632" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="27">Select <emph>Printer </emph>in the <emph>Output</emph> area, and then click<emph> OK. </emph>The form letters are sent to the printer as one print job. If you want to send each form letter to the printer as a separate print job, select <emph>Single print jobs</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3151185" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="U" oldref="37">To save the output of a form letter:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3151208" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="28">Select <emph>File</emph> in the <emph>Output</emph> area.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3151239" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="38">Specify where you want to save the form letter files in the <emph>Path</emph> box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155926" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="39">Do one of the following:</paragraph> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155940" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="40">Select a field to use for the file name in the <emph>Generate file name from</emph> box.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155961" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="41">Enter a name in the <emph>Manual setting</emph> text box. $[officename] automatically generates a sequence number and adds the number to the end of the file name. </paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155988" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="42">Click <emph>OK</emph>. A separate file is created for each form letter.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/shared/01/01010100.xhp#vor_und_dok"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp#fields"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/data_addressbook.xhp#data_addressbook"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/database_main.xhp#database_main"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp index 83a84671f6..4a853e6950 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,169 +52,169 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguideglobaldocxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Using Master Documents and Subdocuments</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T09:29:34">UFI: fixed #i25344# - FPE: fixed #110245#</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideglobaldocxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Using Master Documents and Subdocuments</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T09:29:34">UFI: fixed #i25344# - FPE: fixed #110245#</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145246"><bookmark_value>master documents</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>central documents</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>subsidiary documents</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>documents; sub-documents</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>documents; master documents</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145246"><bookmark_value>master documents</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>central documents</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>subsidiary documents</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>documents; sub-documents</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>documents; master documents</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>Navigator;master documents</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3145246" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="4"><variable id="globaldoc"><link href="text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp">Using Master Documents and Subdocuments</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149806" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="C">A master document lets you manage large documents, such as a book with many chapters, by acting as a container for individual <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME</item> Writer files. The individual files are called subdocuments. You can also separate a large document that is b<emph>eing worked on by several people into subdocuments and then add the s</emph>ubdocuments to a master document.</paragraph>
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149806" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="C">A master document lets you manage large documents, such as a book with many chapters, by acting as a container for individual <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME</item> Writer files. The individual files are called subdocuments. You can also separate a large document that is b<emph>eing worked on by several people into subdocuments and then add the s</emph>ubdocuments to a master document.</paragraph> <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155180" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="C">When you add a document to a master document or create a new subdocument, a link is created in the master document. You cannot edit the content of a subdocument directly in the master document, but you can use the Navigator to open any subdocument for edit.</paragraph> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149490"><bookmark_value>references; master documents</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>bookmarks; master documents</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149490"><bookmark_value>references; master documents</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>bookmarks; master documents</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>master documents; bookmarks</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149490" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="19">Page, caption, footnote, endnote, and any other numbering that you have set in the subdocuments, is carried over into the master document. For example, if the last footnote in the first subdocument is footnote 6, then the first footnote in the next subdocument will be footnote 7.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155854" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="15">Styles that are used in subdocuments, such as paragraph styles, are automatically imported into the master document after you save the master document. When you modify the style in the master document, the style in the subdocument is unaffected.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="tip" id="par_id3156108" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="16">Use the same document template for the master document and its subdocuments. When you modify or create a style, add it to the document template, and then reload the master document to apply to the subdocuments.</paragraph>
+</bookmark> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149490" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="19">Page, caption, footnote, endnote, and any other numbering that you have set in the subdocuments, is carried over into the master document. For example, if the last footnote in the first subdocument is footnote 6, then the first footnote in the next subdocument will be footnote 7.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155854" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="15">Styles that are used in subdocuments, such as paragraph styles, are automatically imported into the master document after you save the master document. When you modify the style in the master document, the style in the subdocument is unaffected.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="tip" id="par_id3156108" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="16">Use the same document template for the master document and its subdocuments. When you modify or create a style, add it to the document template, and then reload the master document to apply to the subdocuments.</paragraph> <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150096" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="13">When you print a master document, the contents of all subdocuments, indexes, and any text that you entered are printed.</paragraph> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3153400"><bookmark_value>master documents; indexes</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3153400"><bookmark_value>master documents; indexes</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>indexes; master documents</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153400" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="12">You can create a table of contents and index in the master document for all of the subdocuments.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3153127" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="29">To create a master document: </paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149634" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="30">Do one of the following:</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149956" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="31">Choose <emph>File - New - Master Document</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149612" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="32">Open an existing document and choose <emph>File - Send - Create Master Document</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="ordered" startwith="2">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149873" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="28">If you are creating a new master document, the first entry in the Navigator should be a <emph>Text </emph>entry (see illustration). Type an introduction or enter some text. This ensures that the styles that you define in the master document are valid in the subdocuments.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145114" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="33">In the <emph>Navigator</emph>, long-click the <emph>Insert </emph>icon, and do one of the following:</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156240" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="34">To insert an existing file as a subdocument, choose <emph>File</emph>, locate the file that you want to include, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145405" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="35">To create a new subdocument, choose <emph>New Document</emph>, type a name for the file, and then click <emph>Save</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<table id="tbl_id3155321">
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
+</bookmark> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153400" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="12">You can create a table of contents and index in the master document for all of the subdocuments.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3153127" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="29">To create a master document: </paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149634" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="30">Do one of the following:</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149956" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="31">Choose <emph>File - New - Master Document</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149612" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="32">Open an existing document and choose <emph>File - Send - Create Master Document</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="ordered" startwith="2"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149873" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="28">If you are creating a new master document, the first entry in the Navigator should be a <emph>Text </emph>entry (see illustration). Type an introduction or enter some text. This ensures that the styles that you define in the master document are valid in the subdocuments.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145114" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="33">In the <emph>Navigator</emph>, long-click the <emph>Insert </emph>icon, and do one of the following:</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156240" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="34">To insert an existing file as a subdocument, choose <emph>File</emph>, locate the file that you want to include, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145405" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="35">To create a new subdocument, choose <emph>New Document</emph>, type a name for the file, and then click <emph>Save</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<table id="tbl_id3155321"> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154400" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="E"> <image id="img_id3154409" src="res/helpimg/naviglob.png" width="68mm" height="46.3mm"><alt id="alt_id3154409" xml-lang="en-US">Navigator for master documents</alt> - </image></paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-</table>
-
-<list type="ordered" startwith="4">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153382" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="36">Choose <emph>File - Save</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3154242" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="37">Working With Master Documents</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154255" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="20">Use the Navigator for rearranging and editing the subdocuments in a master document.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154845" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="18">You would like to know the link for a subdocument? Position the mouse pointer in the Navigator on the subdocument's name. The path information of the original document will appear in a small window. If the file is no longer found under the original path, the warning <emph>File not found</emph> is shown in red in addition to the path.</paragraph>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155879" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="38">To open a subdocument for editing, right-click the subdocument in the Navigator list, and then choose <emph>Edit</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3148677" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="8">To add text to a master document, right-click an item in the Navigator list, and then choose <emph>Insert - Text</emph>. A text section is inserted before the selected item in the master document where you can type the text that you want.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155931" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="39">To delete a subdocument from the master document, right-click the subdocument in the Navigator list and choose <emph>Delete</emph>. The source file is not affected by this command.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149982" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="10">To reorder the subdocuments in a master document, drag a subdocument to a new location in the Navigator list. You can also select a subdocument in the list, and click the <emph>Move down</emph> or <emph>Move up </emph>icon.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153022" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="40">To add an index, such as a table of contents, to a master document, right-click a subdocument in the Navigator list, and then choose <emph>Insert - Index</emph>. The index is inserted before the selected subdocument in the master document.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<table id="tbl_id3154206">
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
+ </image></paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +</table> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="4"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153382" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="36">Choose <emph>File - Save</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3154242" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="37">Working With Master Documents</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154255" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="20">Use the Navigator for rearranging and editing the subdocuments in a master document.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154845" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="18">You would like to know the link for a subdocument? Position the mouse pointer in the Navigator on the subdocument's name. The path information of the original document will appear in a small window. If the file is no longer found under the original path, the warning <emph>File not found</emph> is shown in red in addition to the path.</paragraph> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155879" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="38">To open a subdocument for editing, right-click the subdocument in the Navigator list, and then choose <emph>Edit</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3148677" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="8">To add text to a master document, right-click an item in the Navigator list, and then choose <emph>Insert - Text</emph>. A text section is inserted before the selected item in the master document where you can type the text that you want.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155931" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="39">To delete a subdocument from the master document, right-click the subdocument in the Navigator list and choose <emph>Delete</emph>. The source file is not affected by this command.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149982" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="10">To reorder the subdocuments in a master document, drag a subdocument to a new location in the Navigator list. You can also select a subdocument in the list, and click the <emph>Move down</emph> or <emph>Move up </emph>icon.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153022" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="40">To add an index, such as a table of contents, to a master document, right-click a subdocument in the Navigator list, and then choose <emph>Insert - Index</emph>. The index is inserted before the selected subdocument in the master document.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<table id="tbl_id3154206"> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3148949" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="E"> <image id="img_id3148959" src="sw/imglst/sc20246.png" width="5.64mm" height="5.64mm"><alt id="alt_id3148959" xml-lang="en-US">Icon</alt> - </image></paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153632" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="21">To update an index in a master document, select the index in the Navigator, and then click the <emph>Update</emph> icon.</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-</table>
-
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3153656" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="U" oldref="41">To start each subdocument on a new page:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3152760" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="42">Ensure that each subdocument starts with a heading that uses the same paragraph style, for example "Heading 1".</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153876" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="43">In the master document, choose <emph>Format - Stylist</emph>, and click the <emph>Paragraph Styles </emph>icon.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153907" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="44">Right-click "Heading 1" and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147124" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="45">Click the <emph>Text Flow </emph>tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149770" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="46">In the <emph>Breaks </emph>area, select <emph>Enable</emph>, and then select <emph>Page </emph>in the <emph>Type </emph>box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150224" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="17">If you want each subdocument to start on an odd page, select <emph>With Page Style</emph>, and select "Right page" in the box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145205" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="47">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3145228" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="U" oldref="48">To save a master document as a <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME</item> text document:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150315" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="49">Choose <item type="menuitem">File - Export</item>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3148580" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="50">In the <item type="unknown">File format</item> list, select a text document file format and click <emph>Export</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<section id="relatedtopics">
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154382" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="C"><link href="text/shared/01/02110000.xhp" name="Navigator in master mode">Navigator in master mode</link></paragraph>
-</section>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+ </image></paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153632" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="21">To update an index in a master document, select the index in the Navigator, and then click the <emph>Update</emph> icon.</paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +</table> + +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3153656" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="U" oldref="41">To start each subdocument on a new page:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3152760" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="42">Ensure that each subdocument starts with a heading that uses the same paragraph style, for example "Heading 1".</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153876" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="43">In the master document, choose <emph>Format - Stylist</emph>, and click the <emph>Paragraph Styles </emph>icon.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153907" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="44">Right-click "Heading 1" and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147124" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="45">Click the <emph>Text Flow </emph>tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149770" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="46">In the <emph>Breaks </emph>area, select <emph>Enable</emph>, and then select <emph>Page </emph>in the <emph>Type </emph>box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150224" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="17">If you want each subdocument to start on an odd page, select <emph>With Page Style</emph>, and select "Right page" in the box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145205" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="47">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3145228" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="U" oldref="48">To save a master document as a <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME</item> text document:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150315" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="49">Choose <item type="menuitem">File - Export</item>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3148580" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="50">In the <item type="unknown">File format</item> list, select a text document file format and click <emph>Export</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154382" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="C"><link href="text/shared/01/02110000.xhp" name="Navigator in master mode">Navigator in master mode</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp index cefe6c9da6..735b7ee7ca 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,53 +52,53 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguideheader_footerxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">About Headers and Footers</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T09:02:35">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideheader_footerxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">About Headers and Footers</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T09:02:35">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155863"><bookmark_value>headers;about</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>footers;about</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155863"><bookmark_value>headers;about</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>footers;about</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>HTML documents; headers and footers</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155863" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="38"><variable id="header_footer"><link href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp" name="About Headers and Footers">About Headers and Footers</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154255" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="35">Headers and footers are areas in the top and the bottom page margins, where you can add text or graphics. Headers and footers are added to the current page style. Any page that uses the same style automatically receives the header or footer that you add. You can insert <link href="text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp" name="Fields">Fields</link>, such as page numbers and chapter headings, in headers and footers in a text document.</paragraph>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155896" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="39">To add a header to a page, choose <emph>Insert - Header</emph>, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147119" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="43">To add a footer to a page, choose <emph>Insert - Footer</emph>, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="note" id="par_id3150511" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="44">The page style for the current page is displayed in the <emph>Status Bar</emph>.</paragraph>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153726" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="40">You can also choose <emph>Format - Page</emph>, click the <emph>Header</emph> or <emph>Footer </emph>tab, and then select <emph>Header on </emph>or <emph>Footer on</emph>. Clear the <emph>Same content left/right</emph> check box if you want to define different headers and footers for even and odd pages.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3146876" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="36">To use different headers or footers in your document, you must add them to different <link href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp" name="Page Styles">Page Styles</link>, and then apply the styles to the pages where you want the headers or footer to appear.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3150704" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="41">Headers and Footers in HTML Documents</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150717" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="34">Some of the header and footer options are also available for HTML documents. Headers and footers are not supported by HTML and instead are exported with special tags, so that they can be viewed in a browser. Headers and footers are only exported in HTML documents if they are enabled in Online Layout mode. When you reopen the document in $[officename], the headers and footers are displayed correctly, including any fields that you inserted. </paragraph>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp#header_pagestyles"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153174" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="C"><link href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp" name="Page Styles">Page Styles</link></paragraph>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154255" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="35">Headers and footers are areas in the top and the bottom page margins, where you can add text or graphics. Headers and footers are added to the current page style. Any page that uses the same style automatically receives the header or footer that you add. You can insert <link href="text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp" name="Fields">Fields</link>, such as page numbers and chapter headings, in headers and footers in a text document.</paragraph> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155896" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="39">To add a header to a page, choose <emph>Insert - Header</emph>, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147119" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="43">To add a footer to a page, choose <emph>Insert - Footer</emph>, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="note" id="par_id3150511" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="44">The page style for the current page is displayed in the <emph>Status Bar</emph>.</paragraph> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153726" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="40">You can also choose <emph>Format - Page</emph>, click the <emph>Header</emph> or <emph>Footer </emph>tab, and then select <emph>Header on </emph>or <emph>Footer on</emph>. Clear the <emph>Same content left/right</emph> check box if you want to define different headers and footers for even and odd pages.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3146876" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="36">To use different headers or footers in your document, you must add them to different <link href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp" name="Page Styles">Page Styles</link>, and then apply the styles to the pages where you want the headers or footer to appear.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3150704" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="41">Headers and Footers in HTML Documents</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150717" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="34">Some of the header and footer options are also available for HTML documents. Headers and footers are not supported by HTML and instead are exported with special tags, so that they can be viewed in a browser. Headers and footers are only exported in HTML documents if they are enabled in Online Layout mode. When you reopen the document in $[officename], the headers and footers are displayed correctly, including any fields that you inserted. </paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp#header_pagestyles"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153174" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="C"><link href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp" name="Page Styles">Page Styles</link></paragraph> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp index 61c8a176de..c9b3e1e57a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,77 +52,77 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguideheader_pagestylesxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Defining Different Headers and Footers</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T09:59:25">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideheader_pagestylesxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Defining Different Headers and Footers</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T09:59:25">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155920"><bookmark_value>headers; changing</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>page styles; changing</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155920"><bookmark_value>headers; changing</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>page styles; changing</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>changing; headers</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155920" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="25"><variable id="header_pagestyles"><link href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp" name="Defining Different Headers and Footers">Defining Different Headers and Footers</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154263" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="26">You can use different headers and footers on different pages in your document, so long as the pages use different page styles. $[officename] provides several predefined page styles, such as <emph>First page</emph>, <emph>Left page</emph> and <emph>Right page</emph>, or you can create a custom page style.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3147105" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="27">You can also use the mirrored page layout if you want to add a header to a page style that has different inner and outer page margins. To apply this option to a page style, choose <emph>Format - Page</emph>, click the<emph> Page</emph> tab, and in the<emph> Layout settings</emph> area, choose<emph> Mirrored</emph> in the<emph> Page layout</emph> box.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150224" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="28">For example, you can use page styles to define different headers for even and odd pages in a document.</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150929" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="29">Open a new text document.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150946" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="31">Choose <emph>Format - Stylist</emph> and click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon in the Stylist.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150510" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="30">Right-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150536" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="33">In the <emph>Page Styles</emph> dialog, click the <emph>Header </emph>tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153750" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="34">Select<emph> Header on</emph> and click the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3146865" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="35">In the <emph>Next Style </emph>box, select "Left Page".</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3146889" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="36">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150714" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="37">In the <emph>Stylist</emph>, right-click "Left Page" in the list of page styles and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150748" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="38">In the <emph>Page Styles</emph> dialog, click the <emph>Header </emph>tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153172" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="39">Select<emph> Header on</emph> and click the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147061" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="40">In the <emph>Next Style </emph>box, select "Right Page".</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147086" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="41">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145263" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="42">Double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles to apply the style to the current page.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145284" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="43">Enter text or graphics in the header for the Left Page style. After the next page is added to your document, enter text or graphics in the header for the Right Page style. </paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154263" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="26">You can use different headers and footers on different pages in your document, so long as the pages use different page styles. $[officename] provides several predefined page styles, such as <emph>First page</emph>, <emph>Left page</emph> and <emph>Right page</emph>, or you can create a custom page style.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3147105" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="27">You can also use the mirrored page layout if you want to add a header to a page style that has different inner and outer page margins. To apply this option to a page style, choose <emph>Format - Page</emph>, click the<emph> Page</emph> tab, and in the<emph> Layout settings</emph> area, choose<emph> Mirrored</emph> in the<emph> Page layout</emph> box.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150224" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="28">For example, you can use page styles to define different headers for even and odd pages in a document.</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150929" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="29">Open a new text document.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150946" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="31">Choose <emph>Format - Stylist</emph> and click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon in the Stylist.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150510" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="30">Right-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150536" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="33">In the <emph>Page Styles</emph> dialog, click the <emph>Header </emph>tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153750" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="34">Select<emph> Header on</emph> and click the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3146865" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="35">In the <emph>Next Style </emph>box, select "Left Page".</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3146889" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="36">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150714" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="37">In the <emph>Stylist</emph>, right-click "Left Page" in the list of page styles and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150748" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="38">In the <emph>Page Styles</emph> dialog, click the <emph>Header </emph>tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153172" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="39">Select<emph> Header on</emph> and click the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147061" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="40">In the <emph>Next Style </emph>box, select "Right Page".</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147086" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="41">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145263" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="42">Double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles to apply the style to the current page.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145284" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="43">Enter text or graphics in the header for the Left Page style. After the next page is added to your document, enter text or graphics in the header for the Right Page style. </paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp index 67938630b0..e33b760f26 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,72 +52,72 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguideindices_enterxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Defining Index or Table of Contents Entries</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-03T15:47:19">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideindices_enterxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Defining Index or Table of Contents Entries</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-03T15:47:19">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149689"><bookmark_value>indexes; defining entries in</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>tables of contents; defining entries in</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>entries; defining in indexes</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149689"><bookmark_value>indexes; defining entries in</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>tables of contents; defining entries in</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>entries; defining in indexes</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>entries; defining in tables of contents</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3149689" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="4"><variable id="indices_enter"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp" name="Defining Index or Table of Contents Entries">Defining Index or Table of Contents Entries</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155862" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="6">Defining Index Entries</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156380" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="7">Click in a word, or select the words in your document that you want to use as an index entry.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147409" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="9">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry</emph>, and do one of the following:</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153417" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="11">To change the text that appears in the index, type the text that you want in the <emph>Entry</emph> box. The text that you type here does not replace the selected text in the document.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154258" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="8">To add an index mark to similar words in your document, select <emph>Apply to all similar texts</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155889" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="10">To add the entries to a custom index, click the <emph>New User-defined Index</emph> icon, enter the name of the index, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3147119" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="12">Defining Table of Contents Entries</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3147132" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="5">The best way to generate a table of contents is to apply the predefined heading paragraph styles, such as "Heading 1", to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents. You can also use custom paragraph styles, so long as you assign them one of the predefined outline levels.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3150230" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="U" oldref="13">To use a custom paragraph style as a table of contents entry:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150933" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="14">Choose <emph>Tools - Outline Numbering</emph> and click the <emph>Numbering</emph> tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150964" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="15">Select the paragraph style that you want to include in your table of contents in the <emph>Paragraph Style</emph> box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150523" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="16">In the <emph>Level</emph> list, click the hierarchical level that you want to apply the paragraph style to.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153730" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="17">Click <emph>OK</emph>. You can now apply the style to headings in your document and include them in your table of contents. </paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155862" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="6">Defining Index Entries</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156380" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="7">Click in a word, or select the words in your document that you want to use as an index entry.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147409" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="9">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry</emph>, and do one of the following:</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153417" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="11">To change the text that appears in the index, type the text that you want in the <emph>Entry</emph> box. The text that you type here does not replace the selected text in the document.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154258" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="8">To add an index mark to similar words in your document, select <emph>Apply to all similar texts</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155889" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="10">To add the entries to a custom index, click the <emph>New User-defined Index</emph> icon, enter the name of the index, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3147119" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="12">Defining Table of Contents Entries</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3147132" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="5">The best way to generate a table of contents is to apply the predefined heading paragraph styles, such as "Heading 1", to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents. You can also use custom paragraph styles, so long as you assign them one of the predefined outline levels.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3150230" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="U" oldref="13">To use a custom paragraph style as a table of contents entry:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150933" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="14">Choose <emph>Tools - Outline Numbering</emph> and click the <emph>Numbering</emph> tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150964" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="15">Select the paragraph style that you want to include in your table of contents in the <emph>Paragraph Style</emph> box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150523" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="16">In the <emph>Level</emph> list, click the hierarchical level that you want to apply the paragraph style to.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153730" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="17">Click <emph>OK</emph>. You can now apply the style to headings in your document and include them in your table of contents. </paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp index b2a2f5ef51..90115fb3cd 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,92 +52,92 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguideindices_formxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Formatting an Index or a Table of Contents</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T11:25:17">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideindices_formxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Formatting an Index or a Table of Contents</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T11:25:17">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155855"><bookmark_value>indexes; editing index format</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>editing; index format</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>tables of contents; formatting</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>entries; formatting indexes</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>tables of contents; hyperlinks as entries</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>hyperlinks; as index entry</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155855"><bookmark_value>indexes; editing index format</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>editing; index format</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>tables of contents; formatting</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>entries; formatting indexes</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>tables of contents; hyperlinks as entries</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>hyperlinks; as index entry</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>hyperlinks; in tables of contents</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155855" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="38"><variable id="indices_form"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp" name="Formatting an Index or a Table of Contents">Formatting an Index or a Table of Contents</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154259" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="39">You can apply different paragraph styles, assign hyperlinks to entries, change the layout of indexes, and change the background color of indexes in the <emph>Insert Index</emph> dialog.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155888" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="44">To apply a different paragraph style to an index level:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147110" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="45">Right-click in the index or table of contents, and then choose <emph>Edit Index/Table</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147135" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="46">Click the <emph>Styles </emph>tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150229" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="47">Click an index level in the <emph>Levels </emph>list.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150934" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="48">Click the style that you want to apply in the <emph>Paragraph Style </emph>list.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150960" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="56">Click the assign button <emph><</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150516" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="49">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<table id="tbl_id3150539">
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154259" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="39">You can apply different paragraph styles, assign hyperlinks to entries, change the layout of indexes, and change the background color of indexes in the <emph>Insert Index</emph> dialog.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155888" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="44">To apply a different paragraph style to an index level:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147110" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="45">Right-click in the index or table of contents, and then choose <emph>Edit Index/Table</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147135" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="46">Click the <emph>Styles </emph>tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150229" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="47">Click an index level in the <emph>Levels </emph>list.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150934" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="48">Click the style that you want to apply in the <emph>Paragraph Style </emph>list.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150960" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="56">Click the assign button <emph><</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150516" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="49">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<table id="tbl_id3150539"> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153748" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="E"> <image id="img_id3153754" src="res/helpimg/stich.png" width="216.16mm" height="109.8mm"><alt id="alt_id3153754" xml-lang="en-US">Insert index/table</alt> - </image></paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-</table>
-
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3146878" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="40">To assign hyperlinks to entries in a table of contents:</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3146890" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="50">You can assign a cross-reference as a hyperlink to entries in a table of contents.</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150712" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="51">Right-click in the table of contents, and then choose <emph>Edit Index/Table</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150738" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="42">Click the <emph>Entries</emph> tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3148399" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="52">Click the heading level that you want to assign hyperlinks to in the <emph>Level </emph>list.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3148424" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="53">In the <emph>Structure </emph>area, click in the box in front of <emph>E#</emph>, and then click <emph>Hyperlink</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153171" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="54">Click in the box behind the <emph>E</emph>, and then click <emph>Hyperlink</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147060" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="55">Repeat for each heading level that you want to create hyperlinks for, or click the <emph>All levels</emph> button to apply the formatting to all levels.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+ </image></paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +</table> + +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3146878" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="40">To assign hyperlinks to entries in a table of contents:</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3146890" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="50">You can assign a cross-reference as a hyperlink to entries in a table of contents.</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150712" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="51">Right-click in the table of contents, and then choose <emph>Edit Index/Table</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150738" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="42">Click the <emph>Entries</emph> tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3148399" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="52">Click the heading level that you want to assign hyperlinks to in the <emph>Level </emph>list.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3148424" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="53">In the <emph>Structure </emph>area, click in the box in front of <emph>E#</emph>, and then click <emph>Hyperlink</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153171" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="54">Click in the box behind the <emph>E</emph>, and then click <emph>Hyperlink</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147060" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="55">Repeat for each heading level that you want to create hyperlinks for, or click the <emph>All levels</emph> button to apply the formatting to all levels.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp index 54439db7e8..1437d9debe 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,59 +52,59 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguideindices_indexxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Creating Alphabetical Indexes</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-03T13:50:41">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideindices_indexxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Creating Alphabetical Indexes</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-03T13:50:41">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155911"><bookmark_value>concordance files;indexes</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>indexes;concordance files</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>indexes; alphabetical indexes</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155911"><bookmark_value>concordance files;indexes</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>indexes;concordance files</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>indexes; alphabetical indexes</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>alphabetical indexes</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155911" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="24"><variable id="indices_index"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp" name="Creating Alphabetical Indexes">Creating Alphabetical Indexes</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154233" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="25">Click in your document where you want to insert the index.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154252" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="26">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155884" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="31">On the <emph>Index/Table</emph> tab, select "Alphabetical Index" in the <emph>Type</emph> box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147114" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="36">If you want to use a concordance file, select <emph>Concordance file</emph> in the <emph>Options </emph>area, click the <emph>File</emph>, and then locate an existing file or create a new concordance file.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150223" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="28">Set the formatting options for the index, either on the current tab, or on any of the other tabs of this dialog. For example, if you want to use single letter headings in your index, click the <emph>Entries</emph> tab, and then select <emph>Alphabetical delimiter</emph>. To change the formatting of levels in the index, click the <emph>Styles</emph> tab. </paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150946" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="27">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150502" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="37">To update the index, right-click in the index, and then choose <emph>Update Index/Table</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3152760" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="38"><link href="text/swriter/01/04120250.xhp" name="Creating a concordance file">Creating a concordance file</link></paragraph>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</variable></paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154233" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="25">Click in your document where you want to insert the index.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154252" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="26">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155884" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="31">On the <emph>Index/Table</emph> tab, select "Alphabetical Index" in the <emph>Type</emph> box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147114" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="36">If you want to use a concordance file, select <emph>Concordance file</emph> in the <emph>Options </emph>area, click the <emph>File</emph>, and then locate an existing file or create a new concordance file.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150223" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="28">Set the formatting options for the index, either on the current tab, or on any of the other tabs of this dialog. For example, if you want to use single letter headings in your index, click the <emph>Entries</emph> tab, and then select <emph>Alphabetical delimiter</emph>. To change the formatting of levels in the index, click the <emph>Styles</emph> tab. </paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150946" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="27">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150502" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="37">To update the index, right-click in the index, and then choose <emph>Update Index/Table</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3152760" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="38"><link href="text/swriter/01/04120250.xhp" name="Creating a concordance file">Creating a concordance file</link></paragraph> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp index a4946d8c98..4a3ec1defc 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,107 +52,107 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguideindices_literaturexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Creating a Bibliography</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-03T14:53:31">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideindices_literaturexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Creating a Bibliography</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-03T14:53:31">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149687"><bookmark_value>indexes;creating bibliographies</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149687"><bookmark_value>indexes;creating bibliographies</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>bibliographies</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3149687" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="46"><variable id="indices_literature"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp" name="Creating a Bibliography">Creating a Bibliography</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155864" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="60">A bibliography is a list of works that you reference in a document.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3153402" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="61">Storing Bibliographic Information</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153414" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="62">$[officename] stores bibliographic information in a bibliography database, or in an individual document.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3154244" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="U" oldref="63">To store information in the bibliography database:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155872" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="50">Choose <link href="text/shared/01/02250000.xhp" name="Tools - Bibliography Database"><emph>Tools - Bibliography Database</emph></link>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155900" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="64">Choose <emph>Insert - Record</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147123" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="65">Type a name for the bibliography entry in the <emph>Short name </emph>box, and then add additional information to the record in the remaining boxes.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150219" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="66">Close the<emph> Bibliography Database</emph> window. </paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3150242" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="U" oldref="67">To store bibliographic information in an individual document:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150945" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="68">Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150964" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="51">Choose <link href="text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp" name="Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry"><emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry</emph></link>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150525" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="69">Select <emph>From document content</emph> and click <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153738" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="70">Type a name for the bibliography entry in the <emph>Short name </emph>box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153763" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="71">Select the publication source for the record in the <emph>Type </emph>box, and then add additional information in the remaining boxes.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3146873" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="72">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3146897" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="73">In the <emph>Insert Bibliography Entry </emph>dialog, click <emph>Insert</emph>, and then <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp#speicherhinweis"/>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3150741" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="74">Inserting Bibliography Entries From the Bibliography Database</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3148402" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="75">Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3148421" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="52">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<table id="tbl_id3153155">
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155864" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="60">A bibliography is a list of works that you reference in a document.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3153402" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="61">Storing Bibliographic Information</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153414" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="62">$[officename] stores bibliographic information in a bibliography database, or in an individual document.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3154244" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="U" oldref="63">To store information in the bibliography database:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155872" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="50">Choose <link href="text/shared/01/02250000.xhp" name="Tools - Bibliography Database"><emph>Tools - Bibliography Database</emph></link>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155900" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="64">Choose <emph>Insert - Record</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147123" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="65">Type a name for the bibliography entry in the <emph>Short name </emph>box, and then add additional information to the record in the remaining boxes.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150219" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="66">Close the<emph> Bibliography Database</emph> window. </paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3150242" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="U" oldref="67">To store bibliographic information in an individual document:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150945" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="68">Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150964" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="51">Choose <link href="text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp" name="Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry"><emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry</emph></link>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150525" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="69">Select <emph>From document content</emph> and click <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153738" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="70">Type a name for the bibliography entry in the <emph>Short name </emph>box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153763" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="71">Select the publication source for the record in the <emph>Type </emph>box, and then add additional information in the remaining boxes.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3146873" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="72">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3146897" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="73">In the <emph>Insert Bibliography Entry </emph>dialog, click <emph>Insert</emph>, and then <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp#speicherhinweis"/> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3150741" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="74">Inserting Bibliography Entries From the Bibliography Database</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3148402" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="75">Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3148421" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="52">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<table id="tbl_id3153155"> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153176" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="E"> <image id="img_id3153191" src="res/helpimg/litein.png" width="112.71mm" height="75.14mm"><alt id="alt_id3153191" xml-lang="en-US">Insert Bibliography Entry</alt> - </image></paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-</table>
-
-<list type="ordered" startwith="3">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153231" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="53">Select <emph>From bibliography database</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147059" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="54">Select the name of the bibliography entry that you want to insert in the <emph>Short name </emph>box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147085" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="76">Click <emph>Insert</emph> and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3156060" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="77"><link href="text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp" name="Bibliography Database">Bibliography Database</link></paragraph>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+ </image></paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +</table> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="3"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153231" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="53">Select <emph>From bibliography database</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147059" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="54">Select the name of the bibliography entry that you want to insert in the <emph>Short name </emph>box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147085" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="76">Click <emph>Insert</emph> and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3156060" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="77"><link href="text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp" name="Bibliography Database">Bibliography Database</link></paragraph> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp index aa62e58386..819db85ec1 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,66 +52,66 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguideindices_tocxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Creating a Table of Contents</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T11:32:07">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideindices_tocxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Creating a Table of Contents</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T11:32:07">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147104"><bookmark_value>creating; tables of contents</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>tables of contents; creating</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>tables of contents; updating all</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147104"><bookmark_value>creating; tables of contents</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>tables of contents; creating</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>tables of contents; updating all</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>updating; tables of contents</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3147104" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="16"><variable id="indices_toc"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp" name="Creating a Table of Contents">Creating a Table of Contents</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<section id="tomanual">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150942" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="45">The best way to generate a table of contents is to apply the predefined heading paragraph styles, such as "Heading 1", to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents. After you apply these styles, you can then create a table of contents.</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150510" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="17">Click in your document where you want to create the table of contents.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150528" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="18">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables</emph>, and then click the <link href="text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp" name="Index/Table"><emph>Index/Table</emph></link> tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153746" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="46">Select "Table of Contents" in the <emph>Type</emph> box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3146856" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="47">Select any options that you want.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3146872" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="19">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3146896" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="20">If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select the <emph>Additional Styles </emph>check box in the <emph>Create from</emph> area, and then click the (<emph>...</emph>) button next to the check box. In the <emph>Assign Styles</emph> dialog, click the style in the list, and then click the <emph>>> </emph>or the <emph><< </emph>button to define the outline level for the paragraph style.</paragraph>
-</section>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3153148" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="21">Updating a Table of Contents</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153161" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="22">Do one of the following:</paragraph>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153183" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="48">Right-click in the table of contents and choose <emph>Update Index/Table</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147066" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="44">Choose <emph>Tools - Update - All Indexes and Tables</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</variable></paragraph> +<section id="tomanual"> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150942" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="45">The best way to generate a table of contents is to apply the predefined heading paragraph styles, such as "Heading 1", to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents. After you apply these styles, you can then create a table of contents.</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150510" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="17">Click in your document where you want to create the table of contents.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150528" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="18">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables</emph>, and then click the <link href="text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp" name="Index/Table"><emph>Index/Table</emph></link> tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153746" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="46">Select "Table of Contents" in the <emph>Type</emph> box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3146856" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="47">Select any options that you want.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3146872" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="19">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3146896" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="20">If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select the <emph>Additional Styles </emph>check box in the <emph>Create from</emph> area, and then click the (<emph>...</emph>) button next to the check box. In the <emph>Assign Styles</emph> dialog, click the style in the list, and then click the <emph>>> </emph>or the <emph><< </emph>button to define the outline level for the paragraph style.</paragraph> +</section> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3153148" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="21">Updating a Table of Contents</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153161" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="22">Do one of the following:</paragraph> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153183" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="48">Right-click in the table of contents and choose <emph>Update Index/Table</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147066" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="44">Choose <emph>Tools - Update - All Indexes and Tables</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp index 81b19f39fd..18171457ed 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,86 +52,86 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguideindices_userdefxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">User-Defined Indexes</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T12:39:35">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideindices_userdefxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">User-Defined Indexes</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T12:39:35">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3154896"><bookmark_value>indexes; creating user-defined indexes</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3154896"><bookmark_value>indexes; creating user-defined indexes</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>user-defined indexes</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3154896" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="30"><variable id="indices_userdef"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp" name="User-Defined Indexes">User-Defined Indexes</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155184" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="31">You can create as many user-defined indexes as you want.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155915" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="47">Creating a User-Defined Index</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155867" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="48">Select a word or words that you want to add to a user-defined index.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153410" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="49">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154248" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="50">Click the <emph>New User-defined Index</emph> button next to the <emph>Index </emph>box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155886" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="51">Type a name for the index in the <emph>Name </emph>box and click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147114" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="52">Click<emph> Insert</emph> to add the selected word(s) to the new index. </paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147139" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="53">Click<emph> Close</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3150231" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="54">Inserting a User-Defined Index</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150933" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="32">Click in the document where you want to insert the index.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150952" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="33">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150509" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="55">On the <emph>Index/Table</emph> tab, select the name of the user-defined index that you created in the <emph>Type </emph>box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<table id="tbl_id3150540">
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155184" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="31">You can create as many user-defined indexes as you want.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155915" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="47">Creating a User-Defined Index</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155867" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="48">Select a word or words that you want to add to a user-defined index.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153410" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="49">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154248" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="50">Click the <emph>New User-defined Index</emph> button next to the <emph>Index </emph>box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155886" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="51">Type a name for the index in the <emph>Name </emph>box and click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147114" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="52">Click<emph> Insert</emph> to add the selected word(s) to the new index. </paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147139" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="53">Click<emph> Close</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3150231" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="54">Inserting a User-Defined Index</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150933" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="32">Click in the document where you want to insert the index.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150952" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="33">Choose <emph>Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150509" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="55">On the <emph>Index/Table</emph> tab, select the name of the user-defined index that you created in the <emph>Type </emph>box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<table id="tbl_id3150540"> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153743" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="E"> <image id="img_id3153750" src="res/helpimg/einfgb.png" width="216.16mm" height="109.8mm"><alt id="alt_id3153750" xml-lang="en-US">Insert index/table</alt> - </image></paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-</table>
-
-<list type="ordered" startwith="4">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3146881" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="56">Select any options that you want.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3146897" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="34">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150720" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="20">If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select <emph>Styles</emph>, and then click the (<emph>...</emph>) button next to the box. Click the style in the list, and then click the <emph>>> </emph>or the <emph><< </emph>button to define the outline level for the paragraph style.</paragraph>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+ </image></paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +</table> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="4"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3146881" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="56">Select any options that you want.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3146897" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="34">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150720" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="20">If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select <emph>Styles</emph>, and then click the (<emph>...</emph>) button next to the box. Click the style in the list, and then click the <emph>>> </emph>or the <emph><< </emph>button to define the outline level for the paragraph style.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_line.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_line.xhp index 96c4760a63..a5fc60db3a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_line.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_line.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,56 +52,56 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguideinsert_linexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting a Horizontal Line</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/insert_line.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T10:59:54">UFI: changed line to ruler in command name, fix #i25122#</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideinsert_linexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting a Horizontal Line</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/insert_line.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T10:59:54">UFI: changed line to ruler in command name, fix #i25122#</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3151178"><bookmark_value>horizontal lines; inserting</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>lines; inserting horizontal lines</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>rulers;horizontal ruler <HR></bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3151178"><bookmark_value>horizontal lines; inserting</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>lines; inserting horizontal lines</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>rulers;horizontal ruler <HR></bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>inserting; horizontal lines</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3151178" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="76"><variable id="insert_line"><link href="text/swriter/guide/insert_line.xhp" name="Inserting a Horizontal Line">Inserting a Horizontal Line</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149691" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="82">Click in the document where you want to insert the line.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155186" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="77">Choose <emph>Insert - Horizontal Ruler</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<table id="tbl_id3153400">
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
+</variable></paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149691" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="82">Click in the document where you want to insert the line.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155186" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="77">Choose <emph>Insert - Horizontal Ruler</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<table id="tbl_id3153400"> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154240" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="E"> <image id="img_id3154247" src="res/helpimg/horlin.png" width="124.88mm" height="64.03mm"><alt id="alt_id3154247" xml-lang="en-US">Insert Horizontal Ruler</alt> - </image></paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-</table>
-
-<list type="ordered" startwith="3">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155902" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="83">Click the line that you want to insert in the <emph>Selection </emph>list.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147124" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="84">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150217" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="78">The inserted line is anchored to the current paragraph and centered between the page margins.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150231" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="79">You can also insert one of these lines by dragging it from the<emph> Rulers</emph> folder in the <emph>Gallery</emph> into the current document.</paragraph>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150944" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="80"><link href="text/shared/01/gallery.xhp" name="Gallery">Gallery</link></paragraph>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+ </image></paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +</table> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="3"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155902" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="83">Click the line that you want to insert in the <emph>Selection </emph>list.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147124" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="84">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150217" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="78">The inserted line is anchored to the current paragraph and centered between the page margins.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150231" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="79">You can also insert one of these lines by dragging it from the<emph> Rulers</emph> folder in the <emph>Gallery</emph> into the current document.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150944" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="80"><link href="text/shared/01/gallery.xhp" name="Gallery">Gallery</link></paragraph> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp index 19a1bc2a4e..0a4b6dac6d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,52 +52,52 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguidejoin_numbered_listsxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Combining Numbered Lists</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T13:16:45">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidejoin_numbered_listsxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Combining Numbered Lists</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T13:16:45">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> <bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3150495"><bookmark_value>numbering; combining</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3150495" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="32"><variable id="join_numbered_lists"><link href="text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp" name="Combining Numbered Lists">Combining Numbered Lists</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149692" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="33">You can combine numbered lists into a single consecutively numbered list.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3149452" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="34">To combine consecutive numbered lists:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154479" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="35">Select all of the paragraphs in the lists.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155911" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="36">On the <emph>Object Bar</emph>, click the <emph>Numbering on/off </emph>icon twice.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155870" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="37">To create a numbered list from non-consecutive paragraphs:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153417" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="38">Hold down Ctrl and drag a selection in the first numbered paragraph. You only have to select one character.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149644" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="39">Continue to hold down Ctrl, and drag a selection in each numbered paragraph of the lists you want to combine.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145102" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="40">On the <emph>Object Bar</emph>, click the <emph>Numbering on/off </emph>icon twice.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp#using_numbering"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp#using_numbered_lists"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp#using_numbered_lists2"/>
-<embed href="text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp#numbering_stop"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp#captions"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp#number_sequence"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149692" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="33">You can combine numbered lists into a single consecutively numbered list.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3149452" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="34">To combine consecutive numbered lists:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154479" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="35">Select all of the paragraphs in the lists.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155911" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="36">On the <emph>Object Bar</emph>, click the <emph>Numbering on/off </emph>icon twice.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155870" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="37">To create a numbered list from non-consecutive paragraphs:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153417" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="38">Hold down Ctrl and drag a selection in the first numbered paragraph. You only have to select one character.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149644" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="39">Continue to hold down Ctrl, and drag a selection in each numbered paragraph of the lists you want to combine.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145102" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="40">On the <emph>Object Bar</emph>, click the <emph>Numbering on/off </emph>icon twice.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp#using_numbering"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp#using_numbered_lists"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp#using_numbered_lists2"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp#numbering_stop"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp#captions"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp#number_sequence"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp index b2471f4428..afab932912 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,66 +52,66 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguidekeyboardxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Using Shortcut Keys ($[officename] Writer Accessibility)</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T09:13:01">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidekeyboardxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Using Shortcut Keys ($[officename] Writer Accessibility)</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T09:13:01">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3151169"><bookmark_value>keyboard; accessibility $[officename] Writer</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3151169"><bookmark_value>keyboard; accessibility $[officename] Writer</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>accessibility; $[officename] Writer</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3151169" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="keyboard"><link href="text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp" name="Using Shortcut Keys ($[officename] Writer Accessibility)">Using Shortcut Keys ($[officename] Writer Accessibility)</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149685" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="3">Use the keyboard accelerator Alt+<Letter> to access menu commands. For example, press Alt+I to open the <emph>Insert </emph>menu, and then T to insert a table.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155186" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="4">To open a context menu, press Shift+F10. To close a context menu, press Escape.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155918" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="5">Inserting Frames and Sections</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155870" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="6">Press F6 until the focus is on the<emph> Insert icon on the Main Toolbar</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153398" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="7">Press the right arrow key to open the <emph>Insert </emph>floating toolbar.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149630" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="8">Press the right arrow key until the <emph>Insert Frame Manually</emph> or <emph>Insert Section</emph> icon is selected.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145100" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="20">Press the down arrow key, and then press the right arrow key to set the width of the frame or section that you want to insert.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156237" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="11">Press Enter.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3156253" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="19">Press Enter again to place the cursor inside the frame or section.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3153367" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="13">Inserting Text Tables</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153388" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="14">Press F6 until the focus is on the<emph> Insert icon on the Main Toolbar</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154250" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="15">Press the right arrow key to open the <emph>Insert </emph>floating toolbar.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154849" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="21">Press the right arrow key until the <emph>Insert Table</emph> icon is selected.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155872" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="22">Press the down arrow key, and then use the arrow keys to select the number of columns and rows to include in the table.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155892" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="24">Press Enter.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp#keyboard"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp#text_keys"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149685" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="3">Use the keyboard accelerator Alt+<Letter> to access menu commands. For example, press Alt+I to open the <emph>Insert </emph>menu, and then T to insert a table.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155186" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="4">To open a context menu, press Shift+F10. To close a context menu, press Escape.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155918" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="5">Inserting Frames and Sections</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155870" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="6">Press F6 until the focus is on the<emph> Insert icon on the Main Toolbar</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153398" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="7">Press the right arrow key to open the <emph>Insert </emph>floating toolbar.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149630" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="8">Press the right arrow key until the <emph>Insert Frame Manually</emph> or <emph>Insert Section</emph> icon is selected.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145100" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="20">Press the down arrow key, and then press the right arrow key to set the width of the frame or section that you want to insert.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156237" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="11">Press Enter.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3156253" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="19">Press Enter again to place the cursor inside the frame or section.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3153367" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="13">Inserting Text Tables</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153388" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="14">Press F6 until the focus is on the<emph> Insert icon on the Main Toolbar</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154250" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="15">Press the right arrow key to open the <emph>Insert </emph>floating toolbar.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154849" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="21">Press the right arrow key until the <emph>Insert Table</emph> icon is selected.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155872" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="22">Press the down arrow key, and then use the arrow keys to select the number of columns and rows to include in the table.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155892" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="24">Press Enter.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp#keyboard"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp#text_keys"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp index 3a235e4ddc..ae07bc552c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,62 +52,62 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguideload_stylesxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Using Styles From Another Document or Template</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T11:21:04">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideload_stylesxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Using Styles From Another Document or Template</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T11:21:04">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145086"><bookmark_value>formatting styles; importing</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>styles; importing from other files</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>importing;styles from other files</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145086"><bookmark_value>formatting styles; importing</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>styles; importing from other files</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>importing;styles from other files</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>loading;styles from other files</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3145086" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="10"><variable id="load_styles"><link href="text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp" name="Using Styles From Another Document or Template">Using Styles From Another Document or Template</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154491" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="11">You<comment>this is for embedding into manual</comment> can import styles from another document or template into the current document.</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155910" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="12">Choose <emph>Format - Styles - Load</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<table id="tbl_id3155863">
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154491" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="11">You<comment>this is for embedding into manual</comment> can import styles from another document or template into the current document.</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155910" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="12">Choose <emph>Format - Styles - Load</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<table id="tbl_id3155863"> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149848" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="E"> <image id="img_id3154077" src="res/helpimg/vorlad.png" width="171.19mm" height="65.09mm"><alt id="alt_id3154077" xml-lang="en-US">Load Styles</alt> - </image></paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-</table>
-
-<list type="ordered" startwith="2">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149632" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="15">Use the check boxes at the bottom of the dialog to select the style types that you want to import. To replace styles in the current document that have the same name as the ones you are importing, select <emph>Overwrite</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145098" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="16">Do one of the following:</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156240" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="17">Click an entry in the <emph>Categories </emph>list, then click the template containing the styles that you want to use in the <emph>Templates </emph>list, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153377" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="13">Click <emph>From File</emph>, locate the file containing the styles that you want to use, and then click name, and then click <emph>Open</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp#templates_styles"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/para_style_quickuse.xhp#para_style_quickuse"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+ </image></paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +</table> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="2"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149632" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="15">Use the check boxes at the bottom of the dialog to select the style types that you want to import. To replace styles in the current document that have the same name as the ones you are importing, select <emph>Overwrite</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145098" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="16">Do one of the following:</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156240" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="17">Click an entry in the <emph>Categories </emph>list, then click the template containing the styles that you want to use in the <emph>Templates </emph>list, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153377" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="13">Click <emph>From File</emph>, locate the file containing the styles that you want to use, and then click name, and then click <emph>Open</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp#templates_styles"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/para_style_quickuse.xhp#para_style_quickuse"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp index 5a71ab9ffd..6dcdaa7b59 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,65 +52,65 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguidenumbering_parasxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Modifying Numbering in a Numbered List</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T13:25:32">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidenumbering_parasxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Modifying Numbering in a Numbered List</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T13:25:32">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149637"><bookmark_value>numbering; removing numbers</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>numbering; interrupting</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149637"><bookmark_value>numbering; removing numbers</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>numbering; interrupting</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>bullet lists; interrupting</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3149637" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="numbering_paras"><link href="text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp" name="Modifying Numbering in a Numbered List">Modifying Numbering in a Numbered List</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145092" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="2">You can remove the numbering from a paragraph in a numbered list or change the number that a numbered list starts with.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3145107" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="8">To remove the number from a paragraph in a numbered list:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156248" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="10">Click in front of the first character of the paragraph that you want to remove the numbering from.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153366" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="23">Do one of the following:</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153390" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="11">To remove the number while preserving the indent of the paragraph, press the Backspace key.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154248" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="16">To remove the number and the indent of the paragraph, click the <emph>Numbering on/off</emph> icon on the <emph>Object Bar</emph>. If you save the document in HTML format, a separate numbered list is created for the numbered paragraphs that follow the current paragraph.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3154856" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="18">To change the number that a numbered list starts with:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155877" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="24">Click anywhere in the numbered list.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155895" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="21">Choose <emph>Format - Numbering/Bullets</emph>, and then click the <emph>Options</emph> tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3148691" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="22">Enter the number you want the list to start with in the <emph>Start at</emph> box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147116" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="25">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp#using_numbering"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp#using_numbered_lists"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp#using_numbered_lists2"/>
-<embed href="text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp#numbering_stop"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp#captions"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp#number_sequence"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145092" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="2">You can remove the numbering from a paragraph in a numbered list or change the number that a numbered list starts with.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3145107" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="8">To remove the number from a paragraph in a numbered list:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156248" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="10">Click in front of the first character of the paragraph that you want to remove the numbering from.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153366" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="23">Do one of the following:</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153390" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="11">To remove the number while preserving the indent of the paragraph, press the Backspace key.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154248" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="16">To remove the number and the indent of the paragraph, click the <emph>Numbering on/off</emph> icon on the <emph>Object Bar</emph>. If you save the document in HTML format, a separate numbered list is created for the numbered paragraphs that follow the current paragraph.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3154856" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="18">To change the number that a numbered list starts with:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155877" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="24">Click anywhere in the numbered list.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155895" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="21">Choose <emph>Format - Numbering/Bullets</emph>, and then click the <emph>Options</emph> tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3148691" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="22">Enter the number you want the list to start with in the <emph>Start at</emph> box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147116" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="25">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp#using_numbering"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp#using_numbered_lists"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp#using_numbered_lists2"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp#numbering_stop"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp#captions"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp#number_sequence"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp index da92351ce5..4d2a55cd58 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,58 +52,58 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguidepage_breakxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting and Deleting Page Breaks</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T08:53:43">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidepage_breakxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting and Deleting Page Breaks</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T08:53:43">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155183"><bookmark_value>page breaks; inserting and deleting</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>inserting; page breaks</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>pages; inserting page breaks</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155183"><bookmark_value>page breaks; inserting and deleting</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>inserting; page breaks</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>pages; inserting page breaks</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>formatting; page breaks</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155183" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="page_break"><link href="text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp" name="Inserting and Deleting Page Breaks">Inserting and Deleting Page Breaks</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3149833" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="2">To insert a manual page break:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153402" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="3">Click in your document where you want the new page to begin.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153119" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="4">Press Ctrl+Enter.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3153135" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="6">To delete a manual page break:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149641" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="7">Click in front of the first character on the page that follows the manual page break.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149608" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="8">Press Backspace.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3149624" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="10">To delete a manual page break that occurs before a table:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145111" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="11">Right-click in the table, and choose <emph>Table</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156254" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="13">Click the <link href="text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp" name="Text Flow"><emph>Text Flow</emph></link> tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153380" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="14">Clear the <emph>Break</emph> check box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154249" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="15"><link href="text/swriter/01/04010000.xhp" name="Insert Break dialog">Insert Break dialog</link></paragraph>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3149833" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="2">To insert a manual page break:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153402" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="3">Click in your document where you want the new page to begin.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153119" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="4">Press Ctrl+Enter.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3153135" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="6">To delete a manual page break:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149641" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="7">Click in front of the first character on the page that follows the manual page break.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149608" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="8">Press Backspace.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3149624" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="10">To delete a manual page break that occurs before a table:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145111" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="11">Right-click in the table, and choose <emph>Table</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156254" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="13">Click the <link href="text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp" name="Text Flow"><emph>Text Flow</emph></link> tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153380" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="14">Clear the <emph>Break</emph> check box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154249" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="15"><link href="text/swriter/01/04010000.xhp" name="Insert Break dialog">Insert Break dialog</link></paragraph> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp index 0a86f4ccef..d335615196 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,115 +52,115 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguidepagebackgroundxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Changing Page Backgrounds</title>
-<filename>text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2004-06-29T13:55:14">UFI: part of a series of files to fix #i29922#</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T09:59:54">dedr: reviewed</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidepagebackgroundxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Changing Page Backgrounds</title> +<filename>text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2004-06-29T13:55:14">UFI: part of a series of files to fix #i29922#</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T09:59:54">dedr: reviewed</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id8431653"><bookmark_value>page backgrounds</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>page styles;backgrounds</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>backgrounds on different pages</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>printing;page backgrounds</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id8431653"><bookmark_value>page backgrounds</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>page styles;backgrounds</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>backgrounds on different pages</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>printing;page backgrounds</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>pages;backgrounds</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN107F4" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="NEW"><variable id="pagebackground"><link href="text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp">Changing Page Background</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10812" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">$[officename] uses page styles to specify the background of the pages in a document. For example, to change the page background of one or more pages in a document to a watermark, you need to create a page style that uses the watermark background, and then apply the page style to the pages.</paragraph>
-<section id="define">
-<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN10820" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Change the Page Background</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN10827" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN1082F" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN10837" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN1083F" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">On the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab page, type a name for the page style in the <emph>Name</emph> box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN1084B" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">In the <emph>Next Style</emph> box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN10855" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">To only apply the new page style to a single page, select "Default".</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN10859" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">To apply the new page style to all subsequent pages, select the name of the new page style.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="ordered" startwith="6">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN1085F" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Click the <emph>Background</emph> tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN10867" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">In the list box at the top, select whether you want a solid color or a graphic. Then select your options from the tab page. </paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN1086B" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-</section>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN1087A" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Change the Page Background of All Pages in a Document</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN1087E" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See <link href="text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp#define">To Change the Page Background</link> for details.</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN10892" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN1089A" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN108A2" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Double-click the page style that uses the page background that you want to apply.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN108A5" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Use Different Page Backgrounds in the Same Document</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN108A9" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See <link href="text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp#define">To Change the Page Background</link> for details.</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN108BD" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Click in front of the first character of the paragraph where you want to change the page background.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN108C1" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Insert - Manual Break</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN108C9" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Select <emph>Page break</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN108D1" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">In the <emph>Style </emph>box, select a page style that uses the page background.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN108DB" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">To change the background of the current page only, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to "Default".</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN108DF" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">To change the background of the current and subsequent pages, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to the name of the page style.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="note" id="par_idN108E2" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">If you want to change the page background later on in the document, repeat steps 1 to 3.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="ordered" startwith="5">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN108E8" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10812" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">$[officename] uses page styles to specify the background of the pages in a document. For example, to change the page background of one or more pages in a document to a watermark, you need to create a page style that uses the watermark background, and then apply the page style to the pages.</paragraph> +<section id="define"> +<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN10820" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Change the Page Background</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN10827" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN1082F" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN10837" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN1083F" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">On the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab page, type a name for the page style in the <emph>Name</emph> box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN1084B" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">In the <emph>Next Style</emph> box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN10855" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">To only apply the new page style to a single page, select "Default".</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN10859" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">To apply the new page style to all subsequent pages, select the name of the new page style.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="ordered" startwith="6"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN1085F" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Click the <emph>Background</emph> tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN10867" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">In the list box at the top, select whether you want a solid color or a graphic. Then select your options from the tab page. </paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN1086B" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +</section> +<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN1087A" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Change the Page Background of All Pages in a Document</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN1087E" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See <link href="text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp#define">To Change the Page Background</link> for details.</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN10892" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN1089A" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN108A2" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Double-click the page style that uses the page background that you want to apply.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN108A5" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Use Different Page Backgrounds in the Same Document</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN108A9" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See <link href="text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp#define">To Change the Page Background</link> for details.</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN108BD" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Click in front of the first character of the paragraph where you want to change the page background.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN108C1" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Insert - Manual Break</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN108C9" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Select <emph>Page break</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN108D1" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">In the <emph>Style </emph>box, select a page style that uses the page background.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN108DB" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">To change the background of the current page only, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to "Default".</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN108DF" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">To change the background of the current and subsequent pages, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to the name of the page style.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="note" id="par_idN108E2" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">If you want to change the page background later on in the document, repeat steps 1 to 3.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="ordered" startwith="5"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN108E8" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp index 8118809753..f4ced5e89a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,121 +52,121 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguidepageorientationxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Changing Page Orientation (Landscape or Portrait)</title>
-<filename>text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2004-06-29T10:57:28">UFI: fixing #i29922#</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T11:09:20">dedr: reviewed</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidepageorientationxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Changing Page Orientation (Landscape or Portrait)</title> +<filename>text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2004-06-29T10:57:28">UFI: fixing #i29922#</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T11:09:20">dedr: reviewed</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id9683828"><bookmark_value>page styles;orientation</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>page formats; changing individual pages</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>formatting; changing individual pages</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>portrait and landscape</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>landscape and portrait</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>printing;portrait page format</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>printing;landscape page format</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>orientation;page format</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>paper orientation</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>page orientation;page format</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id9683828"><bookmark_value>page styles;orientation</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>page formats; changing individual pages</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>formatting; changing individual pages</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>portrait and landscape</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>landscape and portrait</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>printing;portrait page format</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>printing;landscape page format</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>orientation;page format</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>paper orientation</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>page orientation;page format</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>sideways orientation of pages</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN106FF" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="NEW"><variable id="pageorientation"><link href="text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp">Changing Page Orientation</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN1071D" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">$[officename] uses page styles to specify the orientation of the pages in a document. For example, to change the page orientation of one or more pages in a document from portrait to landscape in a document, you need to create a page style that uses the landscape orientation, and then apply the page style to the pages.</paragraph>
-<section id="define">
-<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN10720" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Change the Page Orientation to Landscape or Portrait</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN10727" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN10741" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN10749" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Right-click, and choose <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN10751" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">On the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab page, type a name for the page style in the <emph>Name</emph> box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN1075D" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">In the <emph>Next Style</emph> box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN10763" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">To only apply the new page style to a single page, select "Default".</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN1076B" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">To apply the new page style to all subsequent pages, select the name of the new page style.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="ordered" startwith="6">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN10775" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Click the <emph>Page</emph> tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN1077D" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Under <emph>Paper format</emph>, select <emph>Portrait</emph> or <emph>Landscape</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN108AE" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-</section>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN10788" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Change the Page Orientation of All Pages in a Document to Landscape or Portrait</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10972" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses landscape page orientation. See <link href="text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp#define">To Change the Page Orientation to Landscape or Portrait</link> for details.</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN1078F" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN108D0" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN1079B" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Double-click the page style that uses the page orientation that you want to apply.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN107A1" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Use Landscape and Portrait Page Orientation in the Same Document</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN109B5" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses landscape page orientation. See <link href="text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp#define">To Change the Page Orientation to Landscape or Portrait</link> for details.</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN107A8" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Click in front of the first character of the paragraph where you want to change the page orientation.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN107AC" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Insert - Manual Break</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN107B4" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Select <emph>Page break</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN107BC" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">In the <emph>Style </emph>box, select a page style that uses the landscape or portrait page orientation.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN1099A" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">To change the orientation of the current page only, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to "Default".</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN1099E" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">To change the orientation of the current and subsequent pages, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to the name of the page style.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="note" id="par_idN109A1" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">If you want to change the page orientation later on in the document, repeat steps 1 to 3.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="ordered" startwith="5">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN107C4" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN1071D" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">$[officename] uses page styles to specify the orientation of the pages in a document. For example, to change the page orientation of one or more pages in a document from portrait to landscape in a document, you need to create a page style that uses the landscape orientation, and then apply the page style to the pages.</paragraph> +<section id="define"> +<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN10720" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Change the Page Orientation to Landscape or Portrait</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN10727" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN10741" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN10749" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Right-click, and choose <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN10751" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">On the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab page, type a name for the page style in the <emph>Name</emph> box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN1075D" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">In the <emph>Next Style</emph> box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN10763" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">To only apply the new page style to a single page, select "Default".</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN1076B" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">To apply the new page style to all subsequent pages, select the name of the new page style.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="ordered" startwith="6"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN10775" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Click the <emph>Page</emph> tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN1077D" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Under <emph>Paper format</emph>, select <emph>Portrait</emph> or <emph>Landscape</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN108AE" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +</section> +<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN10788" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Change the Page Orientation of All Pages in a Document to Landscape or Portrait</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10972" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses landscape page orientation. See <link href="text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp#define">To Change the Page Orientation to Landscape or Portrait</link> for details.</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN1078F" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN108D0" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN1079B" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Double-click the page style that uses the page orientation that you want to apply.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN107A1" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="NEW">To Use Landscape and Portrait Page Orientation in the Same Document</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN109B5" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses landscape page orientation. See <link href="text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp#define">To Change the Page Orientation to Landscape or Portrait</link> for details.</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN107A8" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Click in front of the first character of the paragraph where you want to change the page orientation.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN107AC" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Choose <emph>Insert - Manual Break</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN107B4" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Select <emph>Page break</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN107BC" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">In the <emph>Style </emph>box, select a page style that uses the landscape or portrait page orientation.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN1099A" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">To change the orientation of the current page only, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to "Default".</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN1099E" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">To change the orientation of the current and subsequent pages, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to the name of the page style.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="note" id="par_idN109A1" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">If you want to change the page orientation later on in the document, repeat steps 1 to 3.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="ordered" startwith="5"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_idN107C4" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp index ac6f0929c1..f8dcd4741c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,96 +52,96 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguidepagestylesxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Creating and Applying Page Styles</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-06-30T17:47:52">UFI: moved index entries to the new guides pageorientation and pagebackground
-dedr: reviewed</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
-<body>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidepagestylesxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Creating and Applying Page Styles</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-06-30T17:47:52">UFI: moved index entries to the new guides pageorientation and pagebackground +dedr: reviewed</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> +<body> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155182" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="pagestyles"><link href="text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp" name="Creating and Applying Page Styles">Creating and Applying Page Styles</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149846" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="10">$[officename] uses page styles to specify the layout of a page, including the page orientation, background, margins, headers, footers, and text columns. To change the layout of an individual page in a document, you must create and apply a custom page style to the page.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN1071A" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">
-<embedvar href="text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp#pageorientation"/>
-</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10722" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">
-<embedvar href="text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp#pagebackground"/>
-</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3156109" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="11">To define a new page style:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153411" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="3">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting.</emph>
-</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153133" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="12">Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149641" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="13">In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149614" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="14">On the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab, type a name in the <emph>Name</emph> box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145110" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="15">Do one of the following:</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156252" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="16">To apply the custom page style to a single page, select the default page style that is used in your document in the <emph>Next Style</emph> box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153376" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="17">To apply the custom page style to more than one page, select its name in the <emph>Next Style</emph> box. To stop using the style, insert a manual page break and assign it a different page style.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="ordered" startwith="6">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154252" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="20">Use the tabs in the dialog to set the layout options for the page style, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3154851" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="21">To apply a page style:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154873" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="22">Click in the page that you want to apply the page style to.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155888" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="23">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>, and then click the<emph> Page Style</emph> icon.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3148685" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="24">Double-click a name in the list.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3148701" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="18">To apply a page style to a new page:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147122" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="4">Click in the document where you want a new page to start.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150210" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="5">Choose <emph>Insert - Manual Break</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150235" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="6">Select <emph>Page break</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150939" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="19">In the <emph>Style </emph>box, select the page style that you want to apply to the page that follows the manual break.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150965" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="25">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149846" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="10">$[officename] uses page styles to specify the layout of a page, including the page orientation, background, margins, headers, footers, and text columns. To change the layout of an individual page in a document, you must create and apply a custom page style to the page.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN1071A" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> +<embedvar href="text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp#pageorientation"/> +</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10722" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> +<embedvar href="text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp#pagebackground"/> +</paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3156109" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="11">To define a new page style:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153411" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="3">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting.</emph> +</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153133" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="12">Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149641" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="13">In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149614" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="14">On the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab, type a name in the <emph>Name</emph> box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145110" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="15">Do one of the following:</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156252" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="16">To apply the custom page style to a single page, select the default page style that is used in your document in the <emph>Next Style</emph> box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153376" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="17">To apply the custom page style to more than one page, select its name in the <emph>Next Style</emph> box. To stop using the style, insert a manual page break and assign it a different page style.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="ordered" startwith="6"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154252" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="20">Use the tabs in the dialog to set the layout options for the page style, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3154851" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="21">To apply a page style:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154873" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="22">Click in the page that you want to apply the page style to.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155888" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="23">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>, and then click the<emph> Page Style</emph> icon.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3148685" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="24">Double-click a name in the list.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3148701" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="18">To apply a page style to a new page:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147122" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="4">Click in the document where you want a new page to start.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150210" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="5">Choose <emph>Insert - Manual Break</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150235" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="6">Select <emph>Page break</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150939" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="19">In the <emph>Style </emph>box, select the page style that you want to apply to the page that follows the manual break.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150965" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="25">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp index 6a3d155243..14320f5ae1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,65 +52,65 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguideprint_previewxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Previewing a Page Before Printing</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T10:48:43">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideprint_previewxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Previewing a Page Before Printing</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T10:48:43">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155179"><bookmark_value>printing; previews</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>previews; print layouts</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>print layouts; checking</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155179"><bookmark_value>printing; previews</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>previews; print layouts</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>print layouts; checking</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>page views</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155179" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="9"><variable id="print_preview"><link href="text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp" name="Previewing a Page Before Printing">Previewing a Page Before Printing</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149847" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="34">Choose <emph>File</emph> - <emph>Page Preview</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155055" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="35">Use the zoom icons on the <emph>Object Bar</emph> to reduce or enlarge the view of the page.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<table id="tbl_id3153404">
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
+</variable></paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149847" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="34">Choose <emph>File</emph> - <emph>Page Preview</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155055" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="35">Use the zoom icons on the <emph>Object Bar</emph> to reduce or enlarge the view of the page.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<table id="tbl_id3153404"> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153132" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="E"> <image id="img_id3153139" src="res/helpimg/prinzoom.png" width="34.13mm" height="7.94mm"><alt id="alt_id3153139" xml-lang="en-US">Change zoom factor using icons in the object bar</alt> - </image></paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-</table>
-
-<list type="ordered" startwith="3">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145093" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="36">Use the arrow keys or the arrow icons on the <emph>Object Bar</emph> to scroll through the document.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<table id="tbl_id3145117">
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
+ </image></paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +</table> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="3"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145093" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="36">Use the arrow keys or the arrow icons on the <emph>Object Bar</emph> to scroll through the document.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<table id="tbl_id3145117"> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3156263" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="E"> <image id="img_id3153367" src="res/helpimg/prinnavi.png" width="26.19mm" height="6.09mm"><alt id="alt_id3153367" xml-lang="en-US">Symbol bar Print Preview</alt> - </image></paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-</table>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp#print_small"/>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154265" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="37"><link href="text/shared/01/01120000.xhp" name="File - Page Preview">File - Page Preview</link>.</paragraph>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+ </image></paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +</table> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp#print_small"/> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154265" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="37"><link href="text/shared/01/01120000.xhp" name="File - Page Preview">File - Page Preview</link>.</paragraph> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp index ae1cdb58fa..9c4bf060a5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,48 +52,48 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguideremoving_line_breaksxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Removing Line Breaks</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T08:35:38">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideremoving_line_breaksxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Removing Line Breaks</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T08:35:38">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149687"><bookmark_value>hard returns;finding & replacing</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>paragraph marks;finding & replacing</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>line breaks;finding & replacing</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149687"><bookmark_value>hard returns;finding & replacing</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>paragraph marks;finding & replacing</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>line breaks;finding & replacing</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>finding & replacing line breaks</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149687" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="E" oldref="10" localize="false"/>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155916" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1">Removing Line Breaks</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155858" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="2">Use the AutoFormat feature to remove line breaks that occur within sentences. Unwanted line breaks can occur when you copy text from another source and paste it into a text document.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="note" id="par_id3153413" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="3">This AutoFormat feature only works on text that is formatted with the "Default" paragraph style. </paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153138" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="5">Choose <emph>Tools - AutoCorrect/AutoFormat</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149645" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="6">On the <emph>Options</emph> tab, ensure that <emph>Combine single line paragraphs if length greater than 50%</emph> is selected. To change the minimum percentage for the line length, double-click the option in the list, and then enter a new percentage.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145093" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="12">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145118" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="7">Select the text containing the line breaks that you want to remove.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156253" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="8">In the <emph>Apply Style </emph>box on the <emph>Object Bar</emph>, choose <emph>Default</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153388" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="9">Choose <emph>Format - AutoFormat - Apply</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</bookmark> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149687" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="E" oldref="10" localize="false"/> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155916" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1">Removing Line Breaks</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155858" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="2">Use the AutoFormat feature to remove line breaks that occur within sentences. Unwanted line breaks can occur when you copy text from another source and paste it into a text document.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="note" id="par_id3153413" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="3">This AutoFormat feature only works on text that is formatted with the "Default" paragraph style. </paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153138" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="5">Choose <emph>Tools - AutoCorrect/AutoFormat</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149645" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="6">On the <emph>Options</emph> tab, ensure that <emph>Combine single line paragraphs if length greater than 50%</emph> is selected. To change the minimum percentage for the line length, double-click the option in the list, and then enter a new percentage.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145093" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="12">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145118" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="7">Select the text containing the line breaks that you want to remove.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156253" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="8">In the <emph>Apply Style </emph>box on the <emph>Object Bar</emph>, choose <emph>Default</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153388" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="9">Choose <emph>Format - AutoFormat - Apply</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp index 2cc0cfadcc..e291c2e4d2 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,37 +52,37 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguidereset_formatxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Resetting Font Attributes</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T10:55:30">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidereset_formatxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Resetting Font Attributes</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T10:55:30">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149963"><bookmark_value>formats; resetting</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>font attributes; resetting</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>fonts; resetting</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149963"><bookmark_value>formats; resetting</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>font attributes; resetting</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>fonts; resetting</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>resetting fonts</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3149963" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="26"><variable id="reset_format"><link href="text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp" name="Resetting Font Attributes">Resetting Font Attributes</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154091" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="27">You can quickly exit manual formatting by pressing the right-arrow key. For example, if you are pressed Ctrl+B to apply the bold typeface to the text that you type, press the right arrow to return to the default character format of the paragraph.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155854" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="28">To reset all direct formatting of existing text, select that text, then choose the menu command <emph>Format - Default</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp#text_emphasize"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp#shortcut_writing"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</variable></paragraph> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154091" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="27">You can quickly exit manual formatting by pressing the right-arrow key. For example, if you are pressed Ctrl+B to apply the bold typeface to the text that you type, press the right arrow to return to the default character format of the paragraph.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155854" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="28">To reset all direct formatting of existing text, select that text, then choose the menu command <emph>Format - Default</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp#text_emphasize"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp#shortcut_writing"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp index 3807532706..29af6b7749 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,35 +52,35 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguideresize_navigatorxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Docking and Resizing Windows</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T11:14:39">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideresize_navigatorxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Docking and Resizing Windows</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T11:14:39">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145088"><bookmark_value>Navigator;changing size</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>Navigator;docking</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>Styles and Formatting window;changing size</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>Styles and Formatting window;docking</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>Gallery;changing size</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>Gallery;docking</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145088"><bookmark_value>Navigator;changing size</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>Navigator;docking</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>Styles and Formatting window;changing size</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>Styles and Formatting window;docking</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>Gallery;changing size</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>Gallery;docking</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>docking; windows resizing</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3145088" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="26"><variable id="resize_navigator"><link href="text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp" name="Docking and Resizing Windows">Docking and Resizing Windows</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155916" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="25">You can dock, undock and resize most $[officename] program windows such as the Navigator or the Styles and Formatting window.</paragraph>
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155916" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="25">You can dock, undock and resize most $[officename] program windows such as the Navigator or the Styles and Formatting window.</paragraph> <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155861" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="27">To dock or undock the Navigator or the Styles and Formatting window, hold down <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command -</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline> and double-click on a gray area in the window.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3156096" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="28">To resize the window, drag a corner or an edge of the window.</paragraph>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp#autohide"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline> and double-click on a gray area in the window.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3156096" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="28">To resize the window, drag a corner or an edge of the window.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp#autohide"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp index d9c283fea7..6fd5f4eebb 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,60 +52,60 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguidesearch_regexpxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Using Wildcards in Text Searches</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T12:44:06">FPE. fix #110141#
-dedr: reviewed</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidesearch_regexpxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Using Wildcards in Text Searches</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T12:44:06">FPE. fix #110141# +dedr: reviewed</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3150099"><bookmark_value>searching; with wildcards</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>regular expressions;searching</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3150099"><bookmark_value>searching; with wildcards</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>regular expressions;searching</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>wildcards; searching in text</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3150099" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="15"><variable id="search_regexp"><link href="text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp">Using Wildcards in Text Searches</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155182" xml-lang="en-US" oldref="50">You can use wildcards when you find and replace text in a document. For example, "s.n" finds "sun" and "son".</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155907" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="40">Choose <emph>Edit - Find & Replace</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155861" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="41">Select the <emph>Regular expressions</emph> check box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149843" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="42">In the <emph>Search for </emph>box, type the search term and the wildcard(s) that you want to use in your search.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156113" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="51">Click <emph>Find </emph>or<emph> Find All</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3153401" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="52">Regular Expression Examples</paragraph>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149641" xml-lang="en-US" oldref="44">The wildcard for a single character is a period (.).</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153136" xml-lang="en-US" oldref="43">The wildcard for zero or more occurrences of the previous character is an asterisk. For example: "123*" finds "12" "123", and "1233".</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149609" xml-lang="en-US" oldref="45">The wildcard combination to search for zero or more occurrences of any character is a period and asterisk (.*).</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149854" xml-lang="en-US" oldref="46">The wildcard for the end of a paragraph is a dollar sign ($). The the wildcard character combination for the start of a paragraph is a caret and a period (^.).</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="note" id="par_id3153414" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="49">You can only search for regular expressions within the same paragraph. That is, you cannot search for one term in a paragraph and a different term in the next paragraph.</paragraph>
-<section id="related">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149875" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="48"><link href="text/shared/01/02100001.xhp" name="List of Wildcards">List of Wildcards</link></paragraph>
-</section>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155182" xml-lang="en-US" oldref="50">You can use wildcards when you find and replace text in a document. For example, "s.n" finds "sun" and "son".</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155907" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="40">Choose <emph>Edit - Find & Replace</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155861" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="41">Select the <emph>Regular expressions</emph> check box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149843" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="42">In the <emph>Search for </emph>box, type the search term and the wildcard(s) that you want to use in your search.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156113" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="51">Click <emph>Find </emph>or<emph> Find All</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3153401" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="52">Regular Expression Examples</paragraph> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149641" xml-lang="en-US" oldref="44">The wildcard for a single character is a period (.).</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153136" xml-lang="en-US" oldref="43">The wildcard for zero or more occurrences of the previous character is an asterisk. For example: "123*" finds "12" "123", and "1233".</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149609" xml-lang="en-US" oldref="45">The wildcard combination to search for zero or more occurrences of any character is a period and asterisk (.*).</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149854" xml-lang="en-US" oldref="46">The wildcard for the end of a paragraph is a dollar sign ($). The the wildcard character combination for the start of a paragraph is a caret and a period (^.).</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="note" id="par_id3153414" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="49">You can only search for regular expressions within the same paragraph. That is, you cannot search for one term in a paragraph and a different term in the next paragraph.</paragraph> +<section id="related"> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149875" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="48"><link href="text/shared/01/02100001.xhp" name="List of Wildcards">List of Wildcards</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp index 4010196327..74f6382f6e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,60 +52,60 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguidestylist_updatexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Updating Styles From Selections</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T12:34:00">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidestylist_updatexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Updating Styles From Selections</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T12:34:00">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155915"><bookmark_value>styles; updating from selections</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>templates; updating from selections</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>Styles and Formatting window; updating from selections</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155915"><bookmark_value>styles; updating from selections</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>templates; updating from selections</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>Styles and Formatting window; updating from selections</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>updating; styles, from selections</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155915" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="38"><variable id="stylist_update"><link href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp" name="Updating Styles From Selections">Updating Styles From Selections</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149838" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="40">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156107" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="47">Click the icon of the style category that you want to update.<comment>UFI: use "category" for consistent wording, see #i21144#</comment></paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149283" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="41">Click in the document where you want to copy the updated style from, for example, in a paragraph that you applied manual formatting to.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153402" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="42">In the Styles and Formatting windows, click the style that you want to update.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153119" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="43">Click the <emph>Update Style</emph> icon.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<table id="tbl_id3149627">
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
+</variable></paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149838" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="40">Choose <emph>Format - Styles and Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156107" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="47">Click the icon of the style category that you want to update.<comment>UFI: use "category" for consistent wording, see #i21144#</comment></paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149283" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="41">Click in the document where you want to copy the updated style from, for example, in a paragraph that you applied manual formatting to.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153402" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="42">In the Styles and Formatting windows, click the style that you want to update.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153119" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="43">Click the <emph>Update Style</emph> icon.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<table id="tbl_id3149627"> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149608" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="E"> <image id="img_id3149615" src="res/commandimagelist/sc_styleupdatebyexample.png" width="5.64mm" height="5.64mm"><alt id="alt_id3149615" xml-lang="en-US">Icon</alt> - </image></paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145097" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="44">Update Style</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-</table>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp#templates_styles"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp#stylist_fillformat"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp#stylist_fromselect"/>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155498" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="45"><link href="text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp" name="Stylist">Styles and Formatting</link></paragraph>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+ </image></paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145097" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="44">Update Style</paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +</table> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp#templates_styles"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp#stylist_fillformat"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp#stylist_fromselect"/> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155498" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="45"><link href="text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp" name="Stylist">Styles and Formatting</link></paragraph> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp index adb9928165..258df88b43 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,44 +52,44 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguidesubscriptxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Making Text Superscript or Subscript</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T12:01:19">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidesubscriptxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Making Text Superscript or Subscript</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T12:01:19">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155174"><bookmark_value>text; subscript and superscript</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>superscript text</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155174"><bookmark_value>text; subscript and superscript</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>superscript text</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>subscript text</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155174" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="subscript"><link href="text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp" name="Making Text Superscript or Subscript">Making Text Superscript or Subscript</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155917" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="2">Select the text that you want to make superscript or subscript.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155865" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="28">Do one of the following:</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149829" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="4">Choose <emph>Format - Character - Position</emph>, and then select <emph>Superscript</emph> or <emph>Subscript</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156111" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="3">Press Ctrl+Shift+P to make the text superscript, and Ctrl+Shift+B to make the text subscript.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153416" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="26"><link href="text/shared/01/05020500.xhp" name="Format - Character - Position">Format - Character - Position</link></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154705" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="27"><link href="text/shared/01/06040200.xhp" name="Tools - AutoCorrect/AutoFormat - Replace">Tools - AutoCorrect/AutoFormat - Replace</link></paragraph>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</variable></paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155917" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="2">Select the text that you want to make superscript or subscript.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155865" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="28">Do one of the following:</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149829" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="4">Choose <emph>Format - Character - Position</emph>, and then select <emph>Superscript</emph> or <emph>Subscript</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156111" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="3">Press Ctrl+Shift+P to make the text superscript, and Ctrl+Shift+B to make the text subscript.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153416" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="26"><link href="text/shared/01/05020500.xhp" name="Format - Character - Position">Format - Character - Position</link></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154705" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="27"><link href="text/shared/01/06040200.xhp" name="Tools - AutoCorrect/AutoFormat - Replace">Tools - AutoCorrect/AutoFormat - Replace</link></paragraph> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cells.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cells.xhp index 5bd82bc3a4..91c411756d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cells.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cells.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,58 +52,58 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguidetable_cellsxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Adding or Deleting a Row or Column to a Table Using the Keyboard</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/table_cells.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T11:55:48">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidetable_cellsxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Adding or Deleting a Row or Column to a Table Using the Keyboard</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/table_cells.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T11:55:48">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3156377"><bookmark_value>rows; inserting in text tables by keyboard</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>columns; inserting in text tables by keyboard</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3156377"><bookmark_value>rows; inserting in text tables by keyboard</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>columns; inserting in text tables by keyboard</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>text tables; inserting rows or columns</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3156377" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="22"><variable id="table_cells"><link href="text/swriter/guide/table_cells.xhp" name="Adding or Deleting a Row or Column to a Table Using the Keyboard">Adding or Deleting a Row or Column to a Table Using the Keyboard</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149487" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="27">You can add or delete rows or columns in table as well as split or merge table cells using the keyboard.</paragraph>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149487" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="27">You can add or delete rows or columns in table as well as split or merge table cells using the keyboard.</paragraph> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> <paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155906" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="28">To insert a new row in a table, place the cursor in a table cell, press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Option -</caseinline><defaultinline>Alt</defaultinline></switchinline>+Ins, and then press the up or down arrow key. You can also move the cursor to the last cell in the table, and then press Tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
+</caseinline><defaultinline>Alt</defaultinline></switchinline>+Ins, and then press the up or down arrow key. You can also move the cursor to the last cell in the table, and then press Tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> <paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147412" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="25">To insert a new column, place the cursor in a table cell, press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Option -</caseinline><defaultinline>Alt</defaultinline></switchinline>+Ins, and then press the left or right arrow key.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
+</caseinline><defaultinline>Alt</defaultinline></switchinline>+Ins, and then press the left or right arrow key.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> <paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156096" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="29">To split a table cell instead of adding a column, press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Option </caseinline><defaultinline>Alt</defaultinline></switchinline>+Ins, and then hold down <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command -</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline> while you press the left or right arrow key.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
+</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline> while you press the left or right arrow key.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> <paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153408" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="26">To delete a row, place the cursor in a table cell, press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Option -</caseinline><defaultinline>Alt</defaultinline></switchinline>+Del, and then press the up or down arrow key.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
+</caseinline><defaultinline>Alt</defaultinline></switchinline>+Del, and then press the up or down arrow key.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> <paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149626" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="30">To delete a column, place the cursor in a table cell, press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Option -</caseinline><defaultinline>Alt</defaultinline></switchinline>+Del, and then press the left or the right arrow key.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
+</caseinline><defaultinline>Alt</defaultinline></switchinline>+Del, and then press the left or the right arrow key.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> <paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149612" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="31">To merge a table into an adjacent cell, place the cursor in the cell, press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Option </caseinline><defaultinline>Alt</defaultinline></switchinline>+Del, hold down <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command -</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>, and then press the left or the right arrow key.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp#tablemode"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp#table_sizing"/>
-<embed href="text/shared/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp#table_cellmerge"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>, and then press the left or the right arrow key.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp#tablemode"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp#table_sizing"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp#table_cellmerge"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp index 97f06aa409..53663acfba 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,63 +52,63 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguidetext_capitalxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Changing the Case of Text</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T12:37:36">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidetext_capitalxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Changing the Case of Text</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T12:37:36">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155182"><bookmark_value>characters; uppercase or lowercase</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>text; uppercase or lowercase</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>lowercase; text</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155182"><bookmark_value>characters; uppercase or lowercase</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>text; uppercase or lowercase</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>lowercase; text</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>uppercase; formatting text</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155182" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="text_capital"><link href="text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp" name="Changing the Case of Text">Changing the Case of Text</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155916" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="2">You can change the case of text, format text with small capitals, or capitalize the first letter of each word in a selection.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155861" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="8">To capitalize text:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147420" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="9">Select the text that you want to capitalize.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149841" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="10">Do one of the following:</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156109" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="6">Choose <emph>Format - Case/Characters - Uppercase</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153414" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="4">Choose <emph>Format - Character</emph>, click the <emph>Font Effects</emph> tab, and then select the type of capitalization in the <emph>Effects</emph> box. "Capitals" capitalizes all of the letters in the selection. "Title" capitalizes the first letter of each word in the selection. "Small capitals" capitalizes every letter in the selection, but in a reduced font size.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3149644" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="11">To change text to lowercase:</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149964" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="12">Select the text that you want to change to lowercase.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149606" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="13">Do one of the following:</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149855" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="7">Choose <emph>Format - Case/Characters - Lowercase</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145093" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="5">Choose<emph> Format - Character</emph>, click the <emph>Font Effects</emph> tab, and then select "Lowercase" in the<emph> Effects</emph> box.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp#text_emphasize"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155916" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="2">You can change the case of text, format text with small capitals, or capitalize the first letter of each word in a selection.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155861" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="8">To capitalize text:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3147420" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="9">Select the text that you want to capitalize.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149841" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="10">Do one of the following:</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156109" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="6">Choose <emph>Format - Case/Characters - Uppercase</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153414" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="4">Choose <emph>Format - Character</emph>, click the <emph>Font Effects</emph> tab, and then select the type of capitalization in the <emph>Effects</emph> box. "Capitals" capitalizes all of the letters in the selection. "Title" capitalizes the first letter of each word in the selection. "Small capitals" capitalizes every letter in the selection, but in a reduced font size.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3149644" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="11">To change text to lowercase:</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149964" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="12">Select the text that you want to change to lowercase.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149606" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="13">Do one of the following:</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149855" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="7">Choose <emph>Format - Case/Characters - Lowercase</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145093" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="5">Choose<emph> Format - Character</emph>, click the <emph>Font Effects</emph> tab, and then select "Lowercase" in the<emph> Effects</emph> box.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp#text_emphasize"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp index 25adc4c745..adfd62e6b9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,51 +52,51 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguidetext_centervertxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T11:56:56">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidetext_centervertxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T11:56:56">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155177"><bookmark_value>text; centering on pages</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>text; positioning in middle</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>centering; text on page</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155177"><bookmark_value>text; centering on pages</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>text; positioning in middle</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>centering; text on page</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>title pages; centering text on</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155177" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="94"><variable id="text_centervert"><link href="text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp" name="Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page">Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155920" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="78">Select the text that you want to center on the page.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155868" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="79">Choose <emph>Insert - Frame</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3152765" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="82">In the <emph>Anchor </emph>area, select <emph>To page</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149844" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="95">In the <emph>Size </emph>area, set the dimensions of the frame.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156114" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="96">In the <emph>Position </emph>area, select "Center" in the <emph>Horizontal </emph>and <emph>Vertical </emph>boxes.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153410" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="97">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="note" id="par_id3149615" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="84">To hide the borders of the frame, select the frame, and then choose <emph>Format - Frame</emph>. Click the <emph>Borders</emph> tab, and then click in the<emph> Set No Border</emph> box in the<emph> Line Arrangement</emph> area.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145098" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="83">To resize the frame, drag the edges of the frame.</paragraph>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp#text_emphasize"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp#text_frame"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</variable></paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155920" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="78">Select the text that you want to center on the page.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155868" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="79">Choose <emph>Insert - Frame</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3152765" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="82">In the <emph>Anchor </emph>area, select <emph>To page</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149844" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="95">In the <emph>Size </emph>area, set the dimensions of the frame.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156114" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="96">In the <emph>Position </emph>area, select "Center" in the <emph>Horizontal </emph>and <emph>Vertical </emph>boxes.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153410" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="97">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="note" id="par_id3149615" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="84">To hide the borders of the frame, select the frame, and then choose <emph>Format - Frame</emph>. Click the <emph>Borders</emph> tab, and then click in the<emph> Set No Border</emph> box in the<emph> Line Arrangement</emph> area.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145098" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="83">To resize the frame, drag the edges of the frame.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp#text_emphasize"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp#text_frame"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp index 01c45cf75e..96e00b7608 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,55 +52,55 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguidetext_direct_cursorxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Using the Direct Cursor</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T12:47:15">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidetext_direct_cursorxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Using the Direct Cursor</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T12:47:15">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155178"><bookmark_value>text; cursor</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>entering text with direct cursor</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>direct cursor; settings</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>writing with direct cursor</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155178"><bookmark_value>text; cursor</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>entering text with direct cursor</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>direct cursor; settings</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>writing with direct cursor</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>cursor;direct cursor</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155178" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="24"><variable id="text_direct_cursor"><link href="text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp" name="Using the Direct Cursor">Using the Direct Cursor</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155908" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="25">The direct cursor allows you to enter text anywhere on a page.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155921" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="41">To set the behavior of the direct cursor, choose <emph>Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids</emph>.</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155908" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="25">The direct cursor allows you to enter text anywhere on a page.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155921" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="41">To set the behavior of the direct cursor, choose <emph>Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids</emph>.</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN106A3" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">On the Main Toolbar, click the <emph>Direct Cursor</emph> icon <image id="img_id3149846" src="sw/imglst/sc22204.png" width="5.64mm" height="5.64mm"><alt id="alt_id3149846" xml-lang="en-US">Icon</alt> - </image>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN106C5" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Click in a free space in the text document. The mouse pointer changes to reflect the alignment that will be applied to the text that you type:</paragraph>
+ </image>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN106C5" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Click in a free space in the text document. The mouse pointer changes to reflect the alignment that will be applied to the text that you type:</paragraph> <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN106C8" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> <image id="img_id5471987" src="res/helpimg/dircursleft.png" width="3.7mm" height="8.2mm"><alt id="alt_id5471987" xml-lang="en-US">Icon</alt> - </image> Align left</paragraph>
+ </image> Align left</paragraph> <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN106E4" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> <image id="img_id5730253" src="res/helpimg/dircurscent.png" width="6.09mm" height="8.2mm"><alt id="alt_id5730253" xml-lang="en-US">Icon</alt> - </image> Centered</paragraph>
+ </image> Centered</paragraph> <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10700" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> <image id="img_id6953622" src="res/helpimg/dircursright.png" width="3.97mm" height="8.2mm"><alt id="alt_id6953622" xml-lang="en-US">Icon</alt> - </image> Align right</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN1071D" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Type your text. %PRODUCTNAME automatically inserts the required number of blank lines, and, if the options are enabled, tabs and spaces.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp#templates_styles"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp#template_create"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp#template_default"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+ </image> Align right</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN1071D" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">Type your text. %PRODUCTNAME automatically inserts the required number of blank lines, and, if the options are enabled, tabs and spaces.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp#templates_styles"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp#template_create"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp#template_default"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp index 98b5615e6b..91640f4289 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,127 +52,127 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguidetext_framexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting, Editing, and Linking Text Frames</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-16T15:06:11">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidetext_framexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting, Editing, and Linking Text Frames</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-16T15:06:11">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149487"><bookmark_value>text frames; inserting</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>frames; inserting for text</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>text frames; moving</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>text frames; enlarging/reducing</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>text frames; scaling</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>scaling; text frames</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>changing; size of text frames</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>linking frames</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>text flow; from frame to frame</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>frames; linking</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>text frames; linking</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>text frames; editing</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>text;not printing</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>printing;hiding text from printing</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149487"><bookmark_value>text frames; inserting</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>frames; inserting for text</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>text frames; moving</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>text frames; enlarging/reducing</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>text frames; scaling</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>scaling; text frames</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>changing; size of text frames</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>linking frames</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>text flow; from frame to frame</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>frames; linking</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>text frames; linking</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>text frames; editing</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>text;not printing</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>printing;hiding text from printing</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>printing;not printing text</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3149487" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="3"><variable id="text_frame"><link href="text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp" name="Inserting, Editing, and Linking Text Frames">Inserting, Editing, and Linking Text Frames</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149842" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="65">A text frame is a container for text and graphics that you can place anywhere on a page. You can also use a frame to apply a column layout to text.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3156104" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="64">Inserting Text Frames</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149961" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="5">Select the text that you want to include in the frame.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149602" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="9">Choose <emph>Insert - Frame</emph>, and click OK.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3145115" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="66">Editing Text Frames</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149578" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="16">To edit the contents of a text frame, click in the frame, and make the changes that you want.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3156239" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="14">To edit a frame, select the frame, right-click, and then choose a formatting option. You can also right-click the selected frame, and choose <emph>Frame</emph>.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3156261" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="63">To resize a text frame, click an edge of frame, and drag one of the edges or corners of the frame. Hold down Shift while you drag to maintain the proportion of the frame.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3153386" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="98">Hiding Text From Printing</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154262" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="99">Any text frame can be set to a mode which allows viewing the text on screen, but hides the text from printing.</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154858" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="100">Select the text frame (you see the eight handles).</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155875" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="101">Choose <emph>Format - Frame - Options</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155899" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="102">In the <emph>Properties</emph> area, unmark the <emph>Print</emph> check box and click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3148701" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="83">Linking Text Frames</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149986" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="84">You can link text frames so that their contents automatically flow from one frame to another.</paragraph>
-<table id="tbl_id3150002">
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155956" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="85">1.</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153025" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="71">Click the edge of a frame that you want to link. Selection handles appear on the edges of the frame.</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149842" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="65">A text frame is a container for text and graphics that you can place anywhere on a page. You can also use a frame to apply a column layout to text.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3156104" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="64">Inserting Text Frames</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149961" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="5">Select the text that you want to include in the frame.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149602" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="CHG" oldref="9">Choose <emph>Insert - Frame</emph>, and click OK.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3145115" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="66">Editing Text Frames</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149578" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="16">To edit the contents of a text frame, click in the frame, and make the changes that you want.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3156239" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="14">To edit a frame, select the frame, right-click, and then choose a formatting option. You can also right-click the selected frame, and choose <emph>Frame</emph>.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3156261" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="63">To resize a text frame, click an edge of frame, and drag one of the edges or corners of the frame. Hold down Shift while you drag to maintain the proportion of the frame.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3153386" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="98">Hiding Text From Printing</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154262" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="99">Any text frame can be set to a mode which allows viewing the text on screen, but hides the text from printing.</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154858" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="100">Select the text frame (you see the eight handles).</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155875" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="101">Choose <emph>Format - Frame - Options</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155899" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="102">In the <emph>Properties</emph> area, unmark the <emph>Print</emph> check box and click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3148701" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="83">Linking Text Frames</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149986" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="84">You can link text frames so that their contents automatically flow from one frame to another.</paragraph> +<table id="tbl_id3150002"> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155956" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="85">1.</paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153025" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="71">Click the edge of a frame that you want to link. Selection handles appear on the edges of the frame.</paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3148962" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="E"> <image id="img_id3148968" src="res/commandimagelist/sc_chainframes.png" width="0.222inch" height="0.222inch"><alt id="alt_id3148968" xml-lang="en-US">Icon</alt> - </image></paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3147132" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="86">2.</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150223" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="87">On the <emph>Object Bar</emph>, click the <emph>Link</emph> icon.</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145222" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="88">3.</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150930" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="89">Click the frame that you want to link to.</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-</table>
-
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150947" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="75">You can only link frames if:</paragraph>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150969" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="76">The target frame is empty.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154365" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="77">The target frame is not linked to another frame.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154383" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="78">The source and the target frames are in the same section. For example, you cannot link a header frame to a footer frame.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145559" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="79">The source frame does not have a next link.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145577" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="81">The target or the source frame are not contained in each other.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3151083" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="90">When you select a linked frame, a line is displayed that connects the linked frames.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="note" id="par_id3147542" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="72">You can only change the height of the last frame in a series of linked frames.</paragraph>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp#text_emphasize"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp#text_centervert"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp#textdoc_inframe"/>
-<embed href="text/shared/guide/floating_toolbar.xhp#floating_toolbar"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+ </image></paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3147132" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="86">2.</paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150223" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="87">On the <emph>Object Bar</emph>, click the <emph>Link</emph> icon.</paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145222" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="88">3.</paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150930" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="89">Click the frame that you want to link to.</paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +</table> + +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150947" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="75">You can only link frames if:</paragraph> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150969" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="76">The target frame is empty.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154365" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="77">The target frame is not linked to another frame.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154383" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="78">The source and the target frames are in the same section. For example, you cannot link a header frame to a footer frame.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145559" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="79">The source frame does not have a next link.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145577" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="81">The target or the source frame are not contained in each other.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3151083" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="90">When you select a linked frame, a line is displayed that connects the linked frames.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="note" id="par_id3147542" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="72">You can only change the height of the last frame in a series of linked frames.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp#text_emphasize"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp#text_centervert"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp#textdoc_inframe"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/floating_toolbar.xhp#floating_toolbar"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp index 6b42563b90..4dd7e98629 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,137 +52,137 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguidetext_nav_keybxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Navigating and Selecting With the Keyboard</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T12:00:02">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidetext_nav_keybxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Navigating and Selecting With the Keyboard</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T12:00:02">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3159260"><bookmark_value>text; navigating with keyboard</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>text; selecting with keyboard</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>navigating; in text</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>selections; of text</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3159260"><bookmark_value>text; navigating with keyboard</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>text; selecting with keyboard</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>navigating; in text</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>selections; of text</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>keyboard; using in text</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3159260" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="33"><variable id="text_nav_keyb"><link href="text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp" name="Navigating and Selecting With the Keyboard">Navigating and Selecting With the Keyboard</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155179" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="13">You can navigate through a document and make selections with the keyboard.</paragraph>
-<table id="tbl_id3149487">
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155918" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="23">Key</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155870" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="24">Function</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3156220" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="25">
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155179" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="13">You can navigate through a document and make selections with the keyboard.</paragraph> +<table id="tbl_id3149487"> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155918" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="23">Key</paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155870" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="24">Function</paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3156220" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="25"> <emph>+</emph><switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><emph>Command key</emph> -</caseinline><defaultinline>
-<emph>Ctrl key</emph></defaultinline></switchinline></paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3156113" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="26">Right/left arrow keys</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150105" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="27">Moves the cursor one character to the left or to the right.</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153418" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="28">Moves the cursor one word to the left or to the right.</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149629" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="29">Up/down arrow keys</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149949" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="30">Moves the cursor up or down one line.</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149972" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="31">(Ctrl+Alt) Moves the current paragraph up or down.</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149624" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="32">Home</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149871" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="56">Moves the cursor to the beginning of the current line.</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145108" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="34">Moves the cursor to the beginning of the document.</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149586" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="35">Home</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3156237" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="36">In a table</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3156260" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="37">Moves the cursor to the beginning of the contents in the current cell.</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145409" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="38">Moves the cursor to the beginning of the contents of the current cell. Press again to move the cursor to the first cell in the table. Press again to move the cursor to the beginning of the document.</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154410" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="41">End</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153372" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="42">Moves the cursor to the end of the current line.</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154235" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="43">Moves the cursor to the end of the document</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154262" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="44">End</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154850" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="45">In a table</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154873" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="46">Moves to the end of the contents in the current cell.</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155894" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="47">Moves the cursor to the end of the contents of the current cell. Press again to move the cursor to the last cell in the table. Press again to move the cursor to the end of the document.</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155944" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="50">PgUp</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3148678" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="54">Scrolls up one page.</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3148701" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="52">Moves the cursor to the header.</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149998" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="53">PgDn</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153018" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="51">Scroll down one page.</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3148949" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="55">Moves the cursor to the footer.</paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-</table>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp#text_keys"/>
-<embed href="text/shared/04/01010000.xhp#common_keys"/>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</caseinline><defaultinline> +<emph>Ctrl key</emph></defaultinline></switchinline></paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3156113" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="26">Right/left arrow keys</paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150105" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="27">Moves the cursor one character to the left or to the right.</paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153418" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="28">Moves the cursor one word to the left or to the right.</paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149629" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="29">Up/down arrow keys</paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149949" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="30">Moves the cursor up or down one line.</paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149972" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="31">(Ctrl+Alt) Moves the current paragraph up or down.</paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149624" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="32">Home</paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149871" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="56">Moves the cursor to the beginning of the current line.</paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145108" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="34">Moves the cursor to the beginning of the document.</paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149586" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="35">Home</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3156237" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="36">In a table</paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3156260" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="37">Moves the cursor to the beginning of the contents in the current cell.</paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3145409" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="38">Moves the cursor to the beginning of the contents of the current cell. Press again to move the cursor to the first cell in the table. Press again to move the cursor to the beginning of the document.</paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154410" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="41">End</paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153372" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="42">Moves the cursor to the end of the current line.</paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154235" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="43">Moves the cursor to the end of the document</paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154262" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="44">End</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154850" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="45">In a table</paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154873" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="46">Moves to the end of the contents in the current cell.</paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155894" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="47">Moves the cursor to the end of the contents of the current cell. Press again to move the cursor to the last cell in the table. Press again to move the cursor to the end of the document.</paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155944" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="50">PgUp</paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3148678" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="54">Scrolls up one page.</paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3148701" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="52">Moves the cursor to the header.</paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149998" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="53">PgDn</paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3153018" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="51">Scroll down one page.</paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3148949" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="55">Moves the cursor to the footer.</paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +</table> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp#text_keys"/> +<embed href="text/shared/04/01010000.xhp#common_keys"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp index 9c53351f8c..aec5053636 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,65 +52,65 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguideusing_thesaurusxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Thesaurus</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T11:23:34">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideusing_thesaurusxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Thesaurus</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T11:23:34">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145576"><bookmark_value>thesaurus; related words</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>related words in thesaurus</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>spelling in thesaurus</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>dictionaries; thesaurus</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>lexicon, see thesaurus</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145576"><bookmark_value>thesaurus; related words</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>related words in thesaurus</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>spelling in thesaurus</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>dictionaries; thesaurus</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>lexicon, see thesaurus</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>synonyms in thesaurus</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3145576" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="15"><variable id="using_thesaurus"><link href="text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp" name="Thesaurus">Thesaurus</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149820" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="16">You can use the thesaurus to look up synonyms, and related words.</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155920" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="17">Click in the word that you want to look up.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149820" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="16">You can use the thesaurus to look up synonyms, and related words.</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155920" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="17">Click in the word that you want to look up.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> <paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155867" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="39">Choose <emph>Tools - Thesaurus</emph>, or press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command -</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+F7.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149848" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="40">In the <emph>Meaning </emph>list, select the definition that matches the context of the word.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<table id="tbl_id3156098">
-<tablerow>
-<tablecell colspan="" rowspan="">
+</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+F7.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149848" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="40">In the <emph>Meaning </emph>list, select the definition that matches the context of the word.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<table id="tbl_id3156098"> +<tablerow> +<tablecell colspan="" rowspan=""> <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150093" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="E"> <image id="img_id3150099" src="res/helpimg/thesuk.png" width="146.84mm" height="60.33mm"><alt id="alt_id3150099" xml-lang="en-US">Dialog Thesaurus English</alt> - </image></paragraph>
-</tablecell>
-</tablerow>
-</table>
-
-<list type="ordered" startwith="4">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153136" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="45">Select the replacement word in the <emph>Synonym </emph>list.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149644" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="46">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="note" id="par_id3145113" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="18">To look up the word in a different language, click <emph>Language </emph>in the<emph> Thesaurus</emph> dialog, select one of the installed languages, and then click <emph>OK</emph>. In the <emph>Thesaurus</emph> dialog, click <emph>Search</emph>. The thesaurus may not be available for all installed languages.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3156263" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="19">If you applied a different language setting to individual words, or paragraphs, the thesaurus for the applied language is used.</paragraph>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp#spellcheck_dialog"/>
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp#using_hyphen"/>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154392" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="41"><link href="text/shared/01/06020000.xhp" name="Thesaurus">Thesaurus</link></paragraph>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+ </image></paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +</table> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="4"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153136" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="45">Select the replacement word in the <emph>Synonym </emph>list.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149644" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="46">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="note" id="par_id3145113" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="18">To look up the word in a different language, click <emph>Language </emph>in the<emph> Thesaurus</emph> dialog, select one of the installed languages, and then click <emph>OK</emph>. In the <emph>Thesaurus</emph> dialog, click <emph>Search</emph>. The thesaurus may not be available for all installed languages.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3156263" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="19">If you applied a different language setting to individual words, or paragraphs, the thesaurus for the applied language is used.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp#spellcheck_dialog"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp#using_hyphen"/> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154392" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="41"><link href="text/shared/01/06020000.xhp" name="Thesaurus">Thesaurus</link></paragraph> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp index 9429dd9a8c..1ba78374b7 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,106 +52,106 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguideword_completionxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Word Completion for Text Documents</title>
-<filename>text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2004-05-03T11:03:45">UFI: new guide by request of users</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-17T15:13:57">FPE: Deleted the screenshot for word completion. This guide needs review!
-YJ: checked English, but didn't review content
-UFI: who did set this to depreciated? Reset to final</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideword_completionxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Word Completion for Text Documents</title> +<filename>text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2004-05-03T11:03:45">UFI: new guide by request of users</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-17T15:13:57">FPE: Deleted the screenshot for word completion. This guide needs review! +YJ: checked English, but didn't review content +UFI: who did set this to depreciated? Reset to final</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3148882"><bookmark_value>automatic word completion</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>completion of words; automatic</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>AutoCorrect function; word completion</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>word completion</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>weekdays; automatically completing</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3148882"><bookmark_value>automatic word completion</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>completion of words; automatic</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>AutoCorrect function; word completion</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>word completion</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>weekdays; automatically completing</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>months; automatically completing</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN10751" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="NEW"><variable id="word_completion"><link href="text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp">Word Completion for Text Documents</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN1076F" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">$[officename] collects words that you frequently use in the current session. When you later type the first three letters of a collected word, $[officename] automatically completes the word. If you want, you can also save the current list of collected words so that it can be used in the next session. </paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149346" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="91">If there is more than one word in the AutoCorrect memory that matches the three letters that you type, press <item type="keycode">Ctrl+Tab</item> to cycle through the available words. To cycle in the opposite direction, press <item type="keycode">Ctrl+Shift+Tab</item>. </paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN1078D" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="NEW"> Using word completion </paragraph>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10794" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">By default, you accept the word completion by pressing the Enter key. </paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN1079B" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> To reject the word completion, continue typing with any other key. </paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN1079E" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="NEW"> Switching off the word completion </paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN107A5" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Choose <emph>Tools - AutoCorrect - Word Completion</emph> . </paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN107AD" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Clear <emph>Enable word completion</emph> . </paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN107B4" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="NEW"> Fine-tuning the word completion </paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN107BB" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Choose <emph>Tools - AutoCorrect - Word Completion</emph> . </paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN107C3" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Select any of the following options: </paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN107C6" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="NEW"> Inserting an additional space character </paragraph>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10B03" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Select <emph>Append space</emph>. </paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="note" id="par_idN10B0E" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> The space character is appended after you type the first character of the next word after the auto-completed word. The space character is suppressed if the next character is a delimiter, such as a full stop or a new line character. </paragraph>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN107CC" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="NEW"> Selecting the accept key </paragraph>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10B20" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Choose the key to accept the suggested word using the <emph>Accept with</emph> list box. </paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN107D2" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="NEW"> Selecting the number of characters </paragraph>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10B36" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Use the <emph>Min. word length</emph> box to set the minimum number of characters a word must have to be collected into the list. </paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN107D8" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="NEW"> Selecting the scope of collected words </paragraph>
-<list type="unordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10B4C" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Select <emph>When closing a document, save the list for later use in other documents</emph>. </paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10B53" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Now the list is also valid for other documents that you open. When you close the last %PRODUCTNAME document, the word list is deleted.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10B56" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> If you do not select the checkbox, the list is only valid as long as the current document is open. </paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id2634968" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">If you want the word list to exist longer than the current %PRODUCTNAME session, save it as a document, as described in the following section.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN107DE" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="NEW"> Working with the word list</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="note" id="par_idN10B94" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> If the automatic spellcheck option is enabled, only the words that are recognized by the spellcheck are collected. </paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10BA1" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Use the word list to always start with a defined set of technical terms for the word completion feature. </paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10BA7" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Open the text document that contains the terms that you want to use for word completion. </paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10BAB" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> The word completion feature collects the words. </paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN107ED" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Select all or some of the words in the list. </paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN107F4" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Use Ctrl+C to copy all selected words into the clipboard. Paste the clipboard into a new document and save it to get a reference list of collected words. </paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10BC6" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Later you can open the reference list and automatically collect the words, so that the word completion feature starts with a defined set of words. </paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<section id="relatedtopics">
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10809" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"><link href="text/shared/01/06040600.xhp">Word Completion </link></paragraph>
-</section>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN1076F" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">$[officename] collects words that you frequently use in the current session. When you later type the first three letters of a collected word, $[officename] automatically completes the word. If you want, you can also save the current list of collected words so that it can be used in the next session. </paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149346" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="91">If there is more than one word in the AutoCorrect memory that matches the three letters that you type, press <item type="keycode">Ctrl+Tab</item> to cycle through the available words. To cycle in the opposite direction, press <item type="keycode">Ctrl+Shift+Tab</item>. </paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN1078D" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="NEW"> Using word completion </paragraph> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10794" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">By default, you accept the word completion by pressing the Enter key. </paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN1079B" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> To reject the word completion, continue typing with any other key. </paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN1079E" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="NEW"> Switching off the word completion </paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN107A5" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Choose <emph>Tools - AutoCorrect - Word Completion</emph> . </paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN107AD" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Clear <emph>Enable word completion</emph> . </paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN107B4" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="NEW"> Fine-tuning the word completion </paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN107BB" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Choose <emph>Tools - AutoCorrect - Word Completion</emph> . </paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN107C3" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Select any of the following options: </paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN107C6" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="NEW"> Inserting an additional space character </paragraph> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10B03" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Select <emph>Append space</emph>. </paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="note" id="par_idN10B0E" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> The space character is appended after you type the first character of the next word after the auto-completed word. The space character is suppressed if the next character is a delimiter, such as a full stop or a new line character. </paragraph> +<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN107CC" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="NEW"> Selecting the accept key </paragraph> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10B20" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Choose the key to accept the suggested word using the <emph>Accept with</emph> list box. </paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN107D2" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="NEW"> Selecting the number of characters </paragraph> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10B36" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Use the <emph>Min. word length</emph> box to set the minimum number of characters a word must have to be collected into the list. </paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN107D8" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="NEW"> Selecting the scope of collected words </paragraph> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10B4C" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Select <emph>When closing a document, save the list for later use in other documents</emph>. </paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10B53" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Now the list is also valid for other documents that you open. When you close the last %PRODUCTNAME document, the word list is deleted.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10B56" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> If you do not select the checkbox, the list is only valid as long as the current document is open. </paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id2634968" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW">If you want the word list to exist longer than the current %PRODUCTNAME session, save it as a document, as described in the following section.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN107DE" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="NEW"> Working with the word list</paragraph> +<paragraph role="note" id="par_idN10B94" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> If the automatic spellcheck option is enabled, only the words that are recognized by the spellcheck are collected. </paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10BA1" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Use the word list to always start with a defined set of technical terms for the word completion feature. </paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10BA7" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Open the text document that contains the terms that you want to use for word completion. </paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10BAB" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> The word completion feature collects the words. </paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN107ED" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Select all or some of the words in the list. </paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN107F4" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Use Ctrl+C to copy all selected words into the clipboard. Paste the clipboard into a new document and save it to get a reference list of collected words. </paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10BC6" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"> Later you can open the reference list and automatically collect the words, so that the word completion feature starts with a defined set of words. </paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10809" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="NEW"><link href="text/shared/01/06040600.xhp">Word Completion </link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp index 65c966fdf3..b599b4cf02 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,45 +52,45 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguidewords_countxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Counting Words</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T11:59:28">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidewords_countxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Counting Words</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T11:59:28">converted from old format - fpe</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149686"><bookmark_value>words; counting in text</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>numbers; words in text</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>text; counting words</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>number of words</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>documents; number of words</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>text; number of words</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>characters; counting</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>number of characters</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>documents; number of characters</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>text; number of characters</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>lines; counting</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>number of lines</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149686"><bookmark_value>words; counting in text</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>numbers; words in text</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>text; counting words</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>number of words</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>documents; number of words</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>text; number of words</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>characters; counting</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>number of characters</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>documents; number of characters</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>text; number of characters</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>lines; counting</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>number of lines</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>documents; number of lines</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3149686" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="1"><variable id="words_count"><link href="text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp" name="Counting Words">Counting Words</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149821" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="5">Choose <emph>File - Properties</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155854" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="3">Click the <emph>Statistics</emph> tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3147418" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="4"><link href="text/shared/01/01100400.xhp" name="File - Properties - Statistics">File - Properties - Statistics</link></paragraph>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</variable></paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149821" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="5">Choose <emph>File - Properties</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155854" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="3">Click the <emph>Statistics</emph> tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3147418" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="4"><link href="text/shared/01/01100400.xhp" name="File - Properties - Statistics">File - Properties - Statistics</link></paragraph> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp index 0af51f2f88..2abeb9f359 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!--*********************************************************************** * * The Contents of this file are made available subject to the terms of @@ -52,76 +52,76 @@ * Contributor(s): _______________________________________ * * - ************************************************************************-->
-
-<helpdocument version="1.0">
-<meta>
-<topic id="textswriterguidewrapxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH">
-<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Wrapping Text Around Objects</title>
-<filename>/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp</filename>
-</topic>
-<history>
-<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created>
-<lastedited date="2004-08-09T11:56:13">FPE: Deleted screenshots</lastedited>
-</history>
-</meta>
+ ************************************************************************--> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidewrapxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Wrapping Text Around Objects</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +<lastedited date="2004-08-09T11:56:13">FPE: Deleted screenshots</lastedited> +</history> +</meta> <body> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3154486"><bookmark_value>text wrap around objects</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>contour editor</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>contour wrap</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>text; formatting around objects</bookmark_value>
-<bookmark_value>formatting; contour wrap</bookmark_value>
+<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3154486"><bookmark_value>text wrap around objects</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>contour editor</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>contour wrap</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>text; formatting around objects</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>formatting; contour wrap</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>objects; contour wrap</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
+</bookmark> <paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3154486" xml-lang="en-US" level="1" l10n="U" oldref="8"><variable id="wrap"><link href="text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp" name="Wrapping Text Around Objects">Wrapping Text Around Objects</link> -</variable></paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149696" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="9">Select the object.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155907" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="10">Choose <emph>Format - Wrap</emph>, and then choose the wrapping style that you want to apply.</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155859" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="4">The current wrapping style is indicated by a bullet.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3149834" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="14">Specifying the Wrapping Properties</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154079" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="15">Select the object.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153396" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="11">Choose <emph>Format - Graphics</emph>, and then click the <link href="text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp" name="Wrap"><emph>Wrap</emph></link> tab.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="ordered" startwith="3">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153370" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="5">Set the options that you want.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153386" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="16">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3154247" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="U" oldref="17">To change the wrapping contour of an graphic:</paragraph>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154262" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="18">You can change the shape that the text wraps around.</paragraph>
-<list type="ordered">
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154860" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="19">Select the graphic, right-click, and then choose <emph>Wrap - Edit Contour</emph>.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<list type="ordered" startwith="2">
+</variable></paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> <listitem> -<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3150231"><bookmark_value>wrapping text;editing contours</bookmark_value>
+<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149696" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="9">Select the object.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155907" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="10">Choose <emph>Format - Wrap</emph>, and then choose the wrapping style that you want to apply.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155859" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="4">The current wrapping style is indicated by a bullet.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3149834" xml-lang="en-US" level="2" l10n="U" oldref="14">Specifying the Wrapping Properties</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154079" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="15">Select the object.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153396" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="11">Choose <emph>Format - Graphics</emph>, and then click the <link href="text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp" name="Wrap"><emph>Wrap</emph></link> tab.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="ordered" startwith="3"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153370" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="5">Set the options that you want.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153386" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="16">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3154247" xml-lang="en-US" level="3" l10n="U" oldref="17">To change the wrapping contour of an graphic:</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3154262" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="18">You can change the shape that the text wraps around.</paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154860" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="19">Select the graphic, right-click, and then choose <emph>Wrap - Edit Contour</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<list type="ordered" startwith="2"> +<listitem> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3150231"><bookmark_value>wrapping text;editing contours</bookmark_value> <bookmark_value>editors;contour editor</bookmark_value> -</bookmark>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150231" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="7">Use the tools to draw a new contour, and then click the <emph>Apply </emph>icon (green check mark).</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150947" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="21">Close the <emph>Contour Editor </emph>window.</paragraph>
-</listitem>
-</list>
-<section id="relatedtopics">
-<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp#insert_graphic"/>
-<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150520" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="22"><link href="text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp" name="Contour Editor">Contour Editor</link></paragraph>
-</section>
-</body>
-</helpdocument>
+</bookmark> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150231" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="7">Use the tools to draw a new contour, and then click the <emph>Apply </emph>icon (green check mark).</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3150947" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="21">Close the <emph>Contour Editor </emph>window.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp#insert_graphic"/> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150520" xml-lang="en-US" l10n="U" oldref="22"><link href="text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp" name="Contour Editor">Contour Editor</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> +</helpdocument> |